Biology Print

Cambridge International AS & A Level
* 4 1 3 4 6 1 3 7 0 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
Paper 2 AS Level Structured Questions February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
bestexamhelp.com
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 60.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (RW/CB) 185439/4
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
Answer all questions.
1 Phloem sap is transported from sources to sinks in phloem sieve tubes. Each sieve tube is
constructed from phloem sieve tube elements.
(a) The structure of a phloem sieve tube element is adapted to its function.
Each of explanations A to F describes how a particular structural feature of a phloem sieve

tube element in a source is suited to the function of transporting phloem sap.
The matching structural feature for each explanation is listed in Table 1.1.
A for entry of sucrose and other organic compounds
B for rapid entry of water to create high hydrostatic pressure
C provides pores to allow the flow of phloem sap from one sieve tube element to the next
D to form very long tubular structures for the transport of phloem sap from source to sink
E decreases resistance to the flow of phloem sap within each sieve tube element, so the
speed of flow is maintained
F provides more space to increase the volume of phloem sap transported per unit time
Complete Table 1.1 by writing the correct letter from A to F in the last column of each row, so
that each structural feature is matched to the correct explanation.
Use each letter only once.
The first row has been completed for you.
Table 1.1
structural feature of phloem sieve tube element explanation
There is no nucleus or large permanent vacuole. F
The end walls are perforated to form sieve plates.
There is only a thin layer of cytoplasm around the edge of the cell.
The cell is elongated and arranged end to end with other cells.
The cell has plasmodesmata connecting to a companion cell.
There is a thin cellulose cell wall.
[4]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

3
(b) At the sink, sucrose and other organic compounds are unloaded from the phloem sieve tube
element.
Explain why the process of unloading helps the mass flow of phloem sap from the source to
the sink.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

4
2 Phosphatidate phosphatase (PAP) enzymes have an important role in lipid metabolism.
The reaction catalysed by PAP is shown in Fig. 2.1.
PAP
phosphatidate + H2O diglyceride + inorganic phosphate (Pi)
Fig. 2.1
Experiments were carried out to investigate the activity of PAP extracted from the cotyledons
(seed leaves) of bitter gourd, Momordica charantia.
(a) There are two types of PAP enzymes:
• PAP1 enzymes need magnesium ions (Mg2+) in the active site to function
• PAP2 enzymes do not need Mg2+.
The effect of different concentrations of Mg2+ on the activity of PAP extracted from M. charantia
was investigated.
The results are shown in Fig. 2.2.
40.0
30.0
PAP activity
/ arbitrary units 20.0
10.0
0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
concentration of Mg2+ / mmol dm –3
Fig. 2.2
Explain, with reference to Fig. 2.2, whether the PAP extracted from M. charantia is a PAP1
enzyme or a PAP2 enzyme.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

5
(b) Fig. 2.3 shows the effect of increasing phosphatidate concentration on the activity of PAP
extracted from M. charantia.
60
40
PAP activity
/ arbitrary units
20
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
phosphatidate concentration / μmol dm –3
Fig. 2.3
With reference to Fig. 2.3, describe and explain the effect of increasing phosphatidate
concentration on the activity of PAP.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

6
(c) The diglycerides formed as a result of the action of PAP can be used to synthesise triglycerides
and membrane phospholipids.
(i) Explain how the structure of a triglyceride is suited to its function as an energy storage
molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why phospholipids are able to form a bilayer in cell membranes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

7
3 During one cardiac cycle:
• blood enters the heart from the lungs and from the rest of the body
• blood leaves the heart to be transported to the lungs and to the rest of the body.
(a) Name the blood vessels entering the heart that bring blood from the rest of the body.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) One phase of the cardiac cycle is ventricular diastole (ventricular relaxation). A number of
events occur in the heart during this phase.
Outline and explain the events that occur in the heart during ventricular diastole.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

8
Blood arriving in the lungs from the heart is oxygenated as it passes through the pulmonary
capillaries.
Sickle-shaped red blood cells are present in a person with sickle cell anaemia. These cells have
a very high quantity of abnormal (sickle cell) haemoglobin and take up and transport less oxygen
than red blood cells containing normal haemoglobin.
(c) The cause of the differences between sickle cell haemoglobin and normal haemoglobin is a
mutation in the gene that codes for one of the two types of polypeptide found in a haemoglobin
molecule. This mutation leads to a change in the mRNA produced during transcription,
causing a change in the primary structure of the polypeptide formed.
Fig. 3.1 shows some of the changes that occur as a result of this gene mutation.
normal sickle cell

haemoglobin haemoglobin
triplet in DNA template strand

P C A C
(strand that is transcribed)
triplet in DNA non-template strand G A G Q
mRNA codon formed G A G R
amino acid carried by tRNA glu val
Fig. 3.1
(i) With reference to Fig. 3.1, state:
• the base sequence of DNA triplet P
....................................................................................................................................
• the base sequence of DNA triplet Q
....................................................................................................................................
• the base sequence of mRNA codon R.
....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Name the type of polypeptide in a haemoglobin molecule that is different in sickle cell
haemoglobin compared to normal haemoglobin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

9
(d) Fig. 3.2 shows the oxygen dissociation curve for adult haemoglobin in a person who does not
have sickle cell anaemia.
100
80
percentage 60
oxygen saturation
of haemoglobin 40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
partial pressure of oxygen
/ kPa
Fig. 3.2
Compared to Fig. 3.2, the oxygen dissociation curve for adult haemoglobin in a person with
sickle cell anaemia is shifted to the right.
The uptake of oxygen by haemoglobin in the lungs and the release of oxygen by haemoglobin
in respiring tissues is different in a person with sickle cell anaemia compared with a person
who does not have the disease.
With reference to Fig. 3.2, state and explain these differences.
uptake of oxygen ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
release of oxygen .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 12]

10
4 (a) When a section of lung tissue is viewed using a light microscope, it is possible to identify the
trachea, the bronchus, the bronchioles and the alveoli.
Other than differences in their diameters, describe one structural difference visible between:
• the trachea and a bronchus
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
• a bronchus and a bronchiole
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
• a bronchiole and an alveolus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The mitotic cell cycle of the stem cells present in the gas exchange system is carefully
controlled. During interphase of the mitotic cell cycle, cells grow by increasing in size.
Complete Table 4.1 by:
• listing, in order, the three phases that occur during interphase
• stating one process, other than growth and respiration, that occurs in each of these
three phases to help prepare the cell for mitosis.
Table 4.1
phase process occurring during phase
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

11
5 Myasthenia gravis and HIV/AIDS both involve disorders of the immune system.
(a) Outline why myasthenia gravis is described as a disorder of the immune system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
A person with HIV/AIDS has a weakened immune system. This is because HIV infects cells of the
immune system, in particular T-helper lymphocytes (Th cells). The pathogen can remain inactive
within host cells. In some people, the pathogen becomes active and causes the number of Th cells
to decrease.
Antiretroviral therapy (ART) is used to treat people who are infected with HIV (living with HIV).
ART aims to keep the number of Th cells at a healthy level.
(b) State the full name of the pathogen known as HIV.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Explain why it is important that ART maintains a healthy number of Th cells in a person living
with HIV.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

12
(d) Fig. 5.1 shows global estimates of:
• the percentage of people living with HIV who received treatment with ART in each year
from 2000 to 2015
• the number of people who died from HIV/AIDS in each year from 2000 to 2015.
50 2.5
40 2.0
percentage of 30 1.5
number of deaths
people living with
from HIV/AIDS
HIV who received
/ millions
treatment 20 1.0
10 0.5
0 0.0
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
year
key
percentage of people living with HIV who received treatment
number of deaths from HIV/AIDS
Fig. 5.1
(i) Describe the trends shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

13
(ii) It is recommended that ART is given to all people living with HIV.
Some countries that support this recommendation find it difficult to provide ART to
everyone living with HIV.
Other than the high cost of treatment, suggest two reasons why it is difficult to provide
ART to everyone living with HIV.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

14
6 Fig. 6.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a plant parenchyma cell.
cell sap
in vacuole
cytosol
(fluid part of
cytoplasm) Y tonoplast
Fig. 6.1
(a) The external environment of the parenchyma cell has a higher water potential than the
internal environment of the cell.
One function of parenchyma cells is to provide support to the plant.
With reference to Fig. 6.1, suggest how parenchyma cells provide support to the plant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

15
(b) The image shown in Fig. 6.1 is at a higher magnification than can be obtained using a typical
light microscope.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term magnification.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The actual diameter of the parenchyma cell in Fig. 6.1 along the line X—Y is 35 μm.
Calculate the magnification of the image.
magnification = × ................................................................
[2]
(c) The cell sap in the vacuole of the cell shown in Fig. 6.1 has a pH of 5.0. The cytosol has a pH
of 7.2.
The tonoplast controls the passage of hydrogen ions from the cytosol into the vacuole. The
low pH created by the entry of hydrogen ions is optimum for the action of acid hydrolase
enzymes in the vacuole. Acid hydrolase enzymes are also found in lysosomes in animal cells.
(i) Suggest which transport mechanism is used to move hydrogen ions from the cytosol of
the parenchyma cell into the vacuole.
Explain your choice.
transport mechanism .........................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

16
(ii) Suggest how the structure of the tonoplast allows hydrogen ions to be transported into
the vacuole, but does not allow the ions to leave the vacuole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The acid hydrolases in the vacuole cannot function in neutral conditions (pH 7.0) or
alkaline conditions.
Explain the advantage to the plant cell of having acid hydrolases that cannot function in
neutral, near neutral or alkaline conditions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

* 9 2 2 5 9 8 7 9 6 1 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
Paper 2 AS Level Structured Questions May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
bestexamhelp.com
INFORMATION
DC (LB/SW) 185258/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows five biological molecules.
CH2OH
H O H CH2OH H
O
A OH H H HO
O
OH CH2OH
H OH OH H
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
O
B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C H
H O H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
H
S
O H C H
H H
C N C C O H
H C N C
H
H C H H O
H
H OH CH2OH H OH CH2OH
O O
H H H H
OH H H OH H H
D O O O O O
H OH H H OH H
H H H H
O O
CH2OH H OH CH2OH H OH
H O H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
H C O C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C H
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
E
O H H H H H H H H H
H
H
H C O C C C C C C C C C C H
C H
CH3 H H O C H
H H H H H H H C H
H C H
H C H
H3C N+ C C O P O C H H C
C
H C
H H
CH3 H H O– H H
H
H
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

3
(a) State the name of the bond in molecule A indicated by the arrow.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Molecule B is described as a saturated fatty acid.
State why molecule B is described as a saturated fatty acid.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Molecule D is a polymer.
State the name of the monomer that is used to synthesise this polymer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State the letter of the molecule that could be formed during the hydrolysis of a polypeptide.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) State the letter of the molecule that forms part of the cell surface membranes of eukaryotic
cells.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Molecule A and molecule C dissolve in water. Molecule B does not dissolve in water.
Explain why molecule A and molecule C dissolve in water, but molecule B does not dissolve
in water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows some stages of the cell cycle in the meristematic tissue in the root tip of a plant.
Three of these stages, P, Q and R, are identified in Table 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
(a) Complete Table 2.1 by stating one feature, visible in Fig. 2.1, that is used to identify each
stage.
Table 2.1
cell stage of cell cycle reason

P prophase of mitosis
Q metaphase of mitosis
R interphase
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

5
(b) (i) Draw a labelled diagram to show one chromosome at metaphase of mitosis.
On the chromosome you have drawn add labels to show:
• the position of a telomere

• a chromatid
• the centromere.
[4]
(ii) State the type of protein that is associated with DNA in chromosomes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe how the spindle is involved during the process of mitosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

6
3 The enzyme glucose 6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) is composed of two identical polypeptide
chains.
(a) Students investigated the activity of two forms of G6PD, J and K, at different concentrations
of substrate. K is a form of the enzyme that results from a mutation that changes one amino
acid in the polypeptide.
70
J
60
K
50
rate of reaction
/ μmol min–1
40
30
20
10
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
concentration of substrate / mmol dm–3
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

7
(i) Use Fig. 3.1 to complete Table 3.1 by stating:
• the Vmax and the Km for enzymes J and K
• the units for Vmax and Km.
Table 3.1
Vmax / Km /
[3]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 3.1 and Table 3.1, describe the effect of the mutation on the activity of
G6PD and suggest an explanation for this effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) In certain conditions, G6PD may also exist as four identical polypeptide chains rather than
two identical polypeptide chains.
Explain why both of these types of G6PD have all four levels of protein structure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows the site of gas exchange in the mammalian lung.
red blood cells
elastic fibres
Fig. 4.1
(a) State two ways in which carbon dioxide is transported in the blood.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Table 4.1 shows the partial pressures of oxygen (pO2) and carbon dioxide (pCO2) at
locations W, X and Y in Fig. 4.1.
Table 4.1
partial locations within tissue

pressure W X Y
pO2 / kPa 13.87 5.33 13.87
pCO2 / kPa 5.33 6.00 5.55
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

9
With reference to Fig. 4.1 and Table 4.1, describe the exchanges that occur as blood flows
from X to Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Elastic fibres are present in tissues at the site of gas exchange in the lungs.
Describe the roles of elastic fibres in the gas exchange system and in the cardiovascular
system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]

10
(d) Scientists in Peru investigated the effect of moving from sea level to high altitude on the
composition of blood. The scientists studied 10 students. Each student had lived at sea level
since birth and then moved to live in the Andes at a height of 4500 metres above sea level.
The scientists took samples of blood from each student before they moved to live at high
altitude. The scientists took further blood samples at intervals after the students had moved
to high altitude.
The relative proportions of red blood cells and plasma in each sample were determined.
The total volume of blood for each student was also determined at each sampling time. As
the students were all of different body mass, the total volumes were converted to a volume
per kg of body mass (cm3 kg–1).
Fig. 4.2 shows for each sampling time:
• the mean volume of blood per kg of body mass

• the proportions of red blood cells and plasma.
120
Key
110
plasma
100
red
blood
90 cells
80
mean volume 70
of blood per kg
of body mass 60
/ cm3 kg–1
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 (at 1 to 2 3 to 4 5 to 6 7 to 8 12
sea level)
time / months after moving to high altitude
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

11
(i) The percentage of mean blood volume that is represented by red blood cells for the
samples taken at sea level is 48%.
Calculate the percentage of mean blood volume that is represented by red blood cells at
5 to 6 months after living at high altitude.
Show your working and give your answer to the nearest whole number.
answer = ......................................................% [2]
(ii) Describe and explain the results in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 16]

12
5 The vaccine used to control tuberculosis (TB) is known as Bacillus Calmette-Guérin (BCG). The
vaccine contains live bacteria that have been selected so that they do not cause disease in humans.
Fig. 5.1 shows a macrophage that is in the process of engulfing the bacteria in the vaccine.
magnification ×4400
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Name the pathogen that causes TB.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how this pathogen is transmitted.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

13
(b) Describe the events that occur in the body after the macrophage has engulfed the bacteria
until the production of antibodies in response to the BCG vaccine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Vaccines, such as BCG, stimulate the formation of memory cells.
Explain the role of memory cells in the body’s defence against the TB pathogen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

14
(d) Suggest why vaccination with BCG has not yet eradicated TB.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

15
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the formation of a polypeptide during translation in a eukaryotic cell.
ser
amino acid
gly
lys ser
val
tRNA
C
C
C
UU U A G C J
GGG A A A U CGGU C
mRNA
movement of ribosome
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the purine bases shown in Fig. 6.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name given to the group of three bases found at J on the tRNA molecule.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Identify the three bases at J.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State how the three bases at J on tRNA interact with the bases on mRNA.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/M/J/20

* 6 4 9 9 4 1 3 9 8 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
bestexamhelp.com
INFORMATION
DC (LB/SW) 185259/2
2
1 Picornaviruses are small viruses that are 30 nm in diameter. Picornaviruses are able to enter the
cells of mammals and birds and can replicate within these cells.
Fig. 1.1 shows the entry of a picornavirus into its host cell.
picornavirus
host cell
surface
membrane
not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the key features of a virus, such as picornavirus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

3
(b) State, with reasons, whether a picornavirus can be seen using the light microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) With reference to Fig. 1.1, describe how the picornavirus enters the host cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 In a healthy mammalian heart, contraction of the four chambers is coordinated by the action of the
sinoatrial node (SAN) and atrioventricular node (AVN).
(a) After the atria fill with blood, atrial systole (contraction) occurs.
State the events that occur to initiate and cause atrial systole.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State and explain how the structure of the heart allows the atria to contract before the
ventricles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

5
(c) Fig. 2.1 shows blood pressure changes that occur in the left ventricle, left atrium and aorta
during one cardiac cycle.
E, F, G and H are the points at which a valve opens or closes as a result of blood pressure
changes.
16
14
12 G
F
aorta
10
blood 8
pressure
left ventricle
/ kPa 6
left atrium
4
2 H
E
0
–2
0 0.75
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(i) For each of the points E, F, G and H on Fig. 2.1, name the valve concerned and state
whether the valve opens or closes.
E .............................................................................
F .............................................................................
G .............................................................................
H ............................................................................. [3]
(ii) Explain how Fig. 2.1 provides evidence that the wall of the left atrium has a different
thickness to the wall of the left ventricle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 The Bacillus Calmette-Guérin (BCG) vaccine is the only vaccine used to provide protection
against the infectious bacterial disease tuberculosis (TB). Most countries of the world have a BCG
vaccination programme.
(a) TB is most commonly transmitted from person to person by aerosol infection. The causative
organism is present in airborne droplets.
Name the species of causative organism of TB commonly passed from person to person by
aerosol infection.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In general, the countries that do not have a BCG vaccination programme are high-income
countries that have a low number of cases of TB. In most of these countries, the vaccine is
given only to babies and children at high risk of developing TB.
Suggest one reason why a child in a country with a low number of cases of the disease could
be at a high risk of developing TB.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Countries are classified by the World Bank into one of four income groups.
Table 3.1 shows the estimated incidence of TB for 2012 to 2016 for these income groups.
The incidence represents the number of new cases of TB occurring per 100 000 people in
one year. The new cases include the number of cases that have occurred again after a period
of recovery (relapse TB).
Table 3.1
incidence per 100 000 people

year
2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
income group
low 253 244 238 231 224
lower middle 244 240 236 232 227
upper middle 84 81 78 76 74
high 14 13 13 12 12
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

7
Describe the patterns and trends shown in Table 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) There is evidence that the BCG vaccine has also provided protection against the disease
leprosy.
Leprosy is caused by a bacterium that is closely related to the bacteria that cause TB.
Suggest why the BCG vaccine can also provide protection against leprosy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) A baby can gain artificial active immunity to TB after having the BCG vaccine. A baby can
also gain natural passive immunity to TB.
State the differences between artificial active immunity and natural passive immunity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]

8
4 Collagen is a major component of the cartilage found in some of the structures of the human gas
exchange system. Cells that synthesise and secrete the components of cartilage are known as
chondrocytes.
(a) Fig. 4.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a chondrocyte.
Fig. 4.1
With reference to Fig. 4.1, explain two features of the chondrocyte that show how the cell is
adapted to its function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Describe the distribution of cartilage in the human gas exchange system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

9
(ii) Outline the function of cartilage in the human gas exchange system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows part of the primary structure of a collagen polypeptide.
gly glu arg gly glu gln gly ala pro gly
Fig. 4.2
(i) Name the type of covalent bond formed between the amino acids shown in Fig. 4.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 4.3 shows the molecular structure of the amino acid glycine (gly).
H H O
N C C
H H O H
Fig. 4.3
With reference to Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.3 and the function of collagen, explain how the
structure of a collagen polypeptide makes it suitable to form a collagen molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

10
5 In most plants, sucrose is the main sugar that is transported from sources to sinks.
(a) In the source, sucrose is transferred from a mesophyll cell to a phloem sieve tube through a
companion cell.
Describe and explain how the transfer of sucrose into a phloem sieve tube from a companion
cell can lead to the transport of the sugar to a sink.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows part of one pathway that is used in plant cells to synthesise sucrose. The
enzyme sucrose synthase catalyses the transfer of glucose from UDPG (uridine diphosphate
glucose) to fructose.
sucrose synthase
UDPG + fructose UDP + sucrose
Fig. 5.1
The structure of UDPG is shown in Fig. 5.2.
uracil
glucose
ribose
Fig. 5.2
(i) Name the type of bond formed when sucrose is synthesised.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

11
(ii) Explain why UDP can be described as a phosphorylated nucleotide.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Sucrose synthase acts by using an induced fit mechanism rather than a lock and key
mechanism.
With reference to sucrose synthase and the synthesis of sucrose, outline the difference
between the induced fit mechanism and lock and key mechanism of enzyme action.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

12
(c) UDPG is used in some algae (photosynthetic protoctists) to synthesise a storage compound
known as floridean starch.
The molecular structure of floridean starch has been described as an intermediate between
amylopectin and glycogen, with little or no amylose.
Describe the molecular structure of floridean starch by completing the passage.
Floridean starch is a polysaccharide composed of ..................................... monomers.
The monomers are joined by ..................................... and ..................................... linkages,
to give a branching structure that is less highly branched than
..................................... .
[4]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

13
6 The mitotic cell cycle in dividing cells is very carefully controlled.
(a) Complete Table 6.1 to show the correct order of stages in the mitotic cell cycle.
Some of the stages have been completed for you.
Table 6.1
stage of cell cycle
G1 phase
............................................... .........................
...............................................
...............................................
...............................................
mitosis
...............................................
telophase
cytokinesis
[3]

14
At various points during the mitotic cell cycle, checks are made. A cell goes through cell death
(apoptosis) if errors occur that cannot be repaired. This makes sure that the daughter cells
produced are genetically identical to each other and to the original cell.
Drugs have been developed that can inhibit the mitotic cell cycle and cause the cell to carry out
apoptosis. These drugs are used in the treatment of cancer.
(b) Vincristine and 5-fluorouracil are chemical compounds that act as cell cycle inhibitors and
can lead to apoptosis.
• Vincristine binds to spindle microtubules and prevents the spindle from carrying out its
function.
• 5-fluorouracil prevents the synthesis of thymine nucleotides.
Complete Table 6.2 to show which event in the cell cycle will occur when Vincristine or
5-fluorouracil are added to healthy dividing cells at the start of the interphase stage of the cell
cycle.
Place a tick (3) if the event will occur or a cross (7) if the event will not occur.
All boxes in the table should be completed.
Table 6.2
sister
event in cell chromosomes
cell enters chromatids
cycle S-phase line up at
prophase of move towards
completes spindle
mitosis opposite
compound equator
poles
Vincristine
5-fluorouracil
[2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

15
(c) Vincristine has been used in the treatment of certain types of leukaemia.
Fig. 6.1 is a photomicrograph of a blood smear of a person with one form of leukaemia, which
affects lymphocytes.
red blood cell
Fig. 6.1
Describe how:
• the blood smear shown in Fig. 6.1 differs from a blood smear of a healthy person
• the lymphocytes in a person with leukaemia, such as those shown in Fig. 6.1, differ from
those of a healthy person.
blood smear differences ............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
lymphocyte differences ..............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/M/J/20

* 8 5 7 9 9 5 7 4 3 1 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
bestexamhelp.com
INFORMATION
DC (LB/SW) 185260/2
2
1 Water and mineral ions are transported up the stem of a plant to the leaves within xylem vessels.
Some water and mineral ions can pass out of xylem vessel elements to supply parenchyma tissue
in the stem.
(a) Fig. 1.1 is a plan diagram of a section through a stem.
Fig. 1.1
Identify one location where xylem tissue occurs in the stem by drawing a label line and the
letter X on Fig. 1.1. [1]
(b) Explain how hydrogen bonding between water molecules contributes to the movement of
water within xylem vessels up the stem to the leaves.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 is a diagram of a photomicrograph showing three adjacent parenchyma cells in the
stem. These parenchyma cells can be described as typical plant cells.
The arrows show the direction of movement of water between the cells.
C
A
B
Fig. 1.2
(i) Describe and explain the movement of water shown in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Only some of the structures visible using the light microscope have been included
in Fig. 1.2.
List the features that can be seen using the high power of a light microscope that help
identify a parenchyma cell as a plant cell and not as an animal cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

4
2 In 2016, the highest number of cases of malaria and deaths caused by the disease were in
sub-Saharan Africa. In many areas of sub-Saharan Africa, malaria is endemic (continually present)
and people are at high risk of becoming infected with the Plasmodium pathogen.
In high risk areas it is recommended that:

• homes are provided with insecticide-treated nets (ITN)
• the surfaces inside homes where Anopheles mosquitoes may rest are sprayed with
insecticide. This is known as indoor residual spraying (IRS).
(a) Explain how the use of ITN and IRS can help break the transmission cycle of malaria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the proportion of the population in sub-Saharan Africa at risk of malaria that is
protected by using IRS or ITN, or both, in the years 2010 to 2016.
100
Key
IRS only
80 ITN & IRS
ITN only
60
percentage
of
population
protected
40
20
0
2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
year
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

5
The main trend in Fig. 2.1 shows that there is an increase in the percentage of the population
protected over time.
(i) State one other trend shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the main trend shown in Fig. 2.1 could be a concern for the World Health
Organization.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) With reference to Fig. 2.1, suggest a reason for the difference in trends shown for ITN
only compared with IRS only.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) In a primary immune response, antibodies against Plasmodium are produced within one to two
weeks following infection. In some people, the pathogen is eliminated and the concentration
of antibodies in the circulation decreases over time.
Infection again by Plasmodium with the same antigens causes a secondary response that
also involves antibody production.
State and explain how the antibody response following a second infection will differ from the
primary immune response.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

6
(d) In malaria, the production of antibodies is beneficial to recovery, whereas in the disease
myasthenia gravis the production of antibodies is harmful.
Explain why the production of antibodies in a person with myasthenia gravis is harmful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through two different types of blood vessels,
X and Y.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Name the two types of blood vessel shown by X and Y in Fig. 3.1.
X ........................................................
Y ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

7
(ii) State the reasons for your identification of the type of blood vessel shown by
Y in Fig. 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Tissue fluid and lymph are formed when blood arrives in the capillary networks of body
tissues.
(i) Explain why tissue fluid is more similar to blood plasma than it is to blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the tissue fluid formed after blood arrives in the capillary network has a
higher concentration of amino acids than the newly formed lymph draining away from
the network.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The trachea, bronchi and bronchioles in the gas exchange system require a supply of glucose
and oxygen from the blood for the functioning of smooth muscle.
Outline the function of smooth muscle in the gas exchange system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
8
4 Saccharomyces cerevisiae is a unicellular fungus that is important in the brewing and baking
industries.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a transmission electron micrograph of S. cerevisiae.
glycogen lysosome
granule
vacuole
cell wall
lipid
droplet
nucleus
cell surface
membrane
1 μm
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student was asked to calculate the magnification of the image shown in Fig. 4.1.
The student began by measuring the length of the scale bar in millimetres using a
millimetre ruler.
State what the student should do next to obtain the correct answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) One function of the lipid droplets shown in Fig. 4.1 is to store triglycerides.
The triglycerides in a lipid droplet are surrounded by a single layer (monolayer) of

phospholipids.
Suggest and explain why phospholipids, rather than triglycerides, are used for the outer
monolayer of the lipid droplet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20
9
(c) The lysosomes and vacuole of S. cerevisiae contain acid hydrolases (hydrolytic enzymes)
that function in an acid pH.
Explain why lysosomes need hydrolases to carry out their function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) A disaccharide, trehalose, is a reserve store of energy for S. cerevisiae when glycogen stores
decrease. The monomer of glycogen and trehalose is α-glucose.
(i) Complete Fig. 4.2 to show the ring structure of one α-glucose molecule.
CH2
H O
H
H
OH
OH
Fig. 4.2
[2]
(ii) A student carried out tests on a solution of trehalose and correctly concluded that
trehalose is a non-reducing sugar.
Outline the procedure carried out by the student and state the results that were
obtained.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

10
(e) The hydrolysis of trehalose is catalysed by two different enzymes produced by S. cerevisiae,
regulatory trehalase and non-regulatory trehalase.
A study was carried out to compare regulatory trehalase and non-regulatory trehalase
extracted from S. cerevisiae.
The results of the study showed that:
• regulatory trehalase had a higher Km value (Michaelis-Menten constant) than

non-regulatory trehalase
• the optimum pH of regulatory trehalase was pH 7.0–7.8
• the optimum pH of non-regulatory trehalase was pH 4.5–5.0.
(i) Explain what is meant by a higher Km value.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Regulatory trehalase is found only in the cytosol, the fluid part of the cytoplasm.
Non-regulatory trehalase has been found on the external surface of the cell surface
membrane and inside the cell.
State the location inside the cell where non-regulatory trehalase is likely to be found and
explain the reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain whether both types of trehalase, regulatory and non-regulatory, can be described
as intracellular enzymes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

11
(f) Saccharomyces boulardii is a strain of S. cerevisiae. It has been researched for its possible
health benefits for some gut diseases.
Researchers investigating trehalase extracted from S. boulardii concluded that only one type
of trehalase was present in the extract.
Fig. 4.3 shows the effect of pH on the activity of the trehalase extracted from S. boulardii.
50
40
trehalase
activity
/ arbitrary 30
units
20
10
3 4 5 6 7 8
pH
Fig. 4.3
With reference to Fig. 4.3 and to the two different types of trehalase enzyme produced
by S. cerevisiae, state and explain what can be deduced about the type of trehalase
present in S. boulardii.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 17]

12
5 Blood cells are formed from tissue stem cells in the bone marrow. These bone marrow stem cells
go through a number of mitotic cell cycles to form the fully functioning blood cell.
Fig. 5.1 shows the three main stages of the cell cycle.
interphase
mitosis
cytokinesis
Fig. 5.1
The activity of genes changes during the mitotic cell cycle.
When genes are being expressed, the cell produces many messenger RNA (mRNA) molecules
and ATP molecules.
(a) Explain what is meant by a gene.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name the main stage of the cell cycle in Fig. 5.1 during which most mRNA and ATP is formed.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

13
(c) Fig. 5.2 is an incomplete diagram of an ATP molecule.
phosphate base ...............................................
sugar ...............................................
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2:
• complete the diagram of the ATP molecule
• write the name of the base in the space provided
• write the name of the sugar in the space provided.

[3]
(ii) The base shown in Fig. 5.2 has a double ring structure.
State the term for a base that has a double ring structure.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest and explain the role of mitosis in the formation of blood cells by the bone marrow
stem cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]

14
6 A student carried out an investigation to estimate the water potential of potato tissue. The main
steps in the procedure and in the analysis of results are outlined in Fig. 6.1.
beaker concentration of
sucrose solution
/ mol dm–3 Six different concentrations of
1 0.0 sucrose solution were prepared
2 0.1 and an equal volume of each
3 0.2 was placed in a labelled beaker.
4 0.3
5 0.4
6 0.5
Six equal-sized blocks of potato

tissue were cut out of the same
potato, blotted dry and weighed.
One potato block was

immersed in the solution in
each beaker for 30 minutes.
After this time, the block was

removed, blotted dry and
reweighed.
The experiment was repeated twice.
The mean percentage change in mass of

potato tissue was calculated for each
concentration of sucrose used.
A graph was drawn of mean percentage

change in the mass of potato tissue
against concentration of sucrose.
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

15
(a) Explain why the different concentrations of sucrose result in different mean percentage
changes in mass of potato tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State how the graph is used to estimate the water potential of the potato tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/M/J/20

* 0 8 9 3 6 0 7 9 6 2 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
Paper 2 AS Level Structured Questions October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 185255/3
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of a human chromosome at a stage in mitosis.
Fig. 1.1
(i) The paragraph describes the structure of the chromosome shown in Fig. 1.1.
Complete the paragraph using the most appropriate term in each space provided.
The chromosome shown in Fig. 1.1 has two genetically identical
.................................................... joined at a .................................................... . The
chromosome is composed of two DNA molecules, each wrapped around proteins known
as .................................................... proteins.
[3]
(ii) State one stage during mitosis when the chromosome would appear as shown in
Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest the role of ATP in the process of mitosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

3
(b) Prokaryotes divide by a process known as binary fission.
Fig. 1.2 shows some of the stages in binary fission.
DNA
cell surface membrane

cell wall
Fig. 1.2
With reference to Fig. 1.2, identify two events that occur during binary fission that do not
occur during mitosis in human cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows the molecular structure of a triglyceride molecule.
H O H H H H H
H C O C C C C C C H
H H H H H
O H H H H H
H C O C C C C C C H
H H H H H
O H H H H H
H C O C C C C C C H
H H H H H H
Fig. 2.1
(i) Draw a circle around an ester bond shown in Fig. 2.1. [1]
(ii) Name the type of reaction used to produce a triglyceride from its components.
State the number of water molecules produced during this reaction.
type of reaction ..................................................................................................................
number of water molecules produced ...............................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

5
BLANK PAGE

6
(b) Lipases are enzymes that digest triglycerides in the lumen of the human intestine. These
enzymes are released by exocytosis from intestinal epithelial cells.
(i) Underline all the terms from the list that are used to describe these lipases.
macromolecule extracellular enzyme fibrous protein polysaccharide
[1]
Scientists have found that treating milk with lipase can improve its taste.
The scientists carried out an experiment to determine the effect of lipase activity on the
triglycerides found in milk.
• Lipase was immobilised in alginate beads.

• The pH of a known volume of milk was adjusted to pH 8 by adding an alkali.
• The beads were then mixed with this milk in a beaker.
• The pH of the reaction mixture was recorded over a period of 24 hours.
8.0
7.8
7.6
7.4
pH of 7.2
reaction
mixture 7.0
6.8
6.6
6.4
6.2
6.0
0 10 20 30
time / h
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

7
Fig. 2.2 shows that the pH decreases steeply and then, after 18 hours, remains constant.
(ii) Calculate the time taken for the pH to decrease from pH 6.6 to pH 6.3.
time taken = ...................................................... h [1]
(iii) Explain the results shown in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iv) The scientists repeated the experiment using a higher concentration of lipase. All other
variables remained constant.
Predict how an increase in the concentration of the lipase would affect the results of the
experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
8
3 (a) The circulatory system of mammals is a double circulation.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term double circulation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 3.1 is a photograph showing one valve in the mammalian heart.
Fig. 3.1
Identify the structures labelled A in Fig. 3.1 and describe their role during the cardiac
cycle.
structure A .........................................................................................................................
role of structure A
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

9
(b) The endocardium is a thin layer of tissue lining the chambers of the heart. A serious condition
called endocarditis results if bacteria infect this tissue.
Endocarditis is treated with a combination of antibiotics. This increases the effectiveness of

the treatment and reduces the risk of antibiotic resistance in bacteria.
Table 3.1 shows the action of two antibiotics used together to treat endocarditis.
Table 3.1
antibiotic used in treatment action of antibiotic
gentamicin binds permanently to the bacterial ribosomes
penicillin G inhibits an enzyme involved in cell wall synthesis
(i) With reference to Table 3.1, explain why treating endocarditis with a combination of
gentamicin and penicillin G reduces the risk of developing antibiotic resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe how the bacteria that cause endocarditis could become resistant to gentamicin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

10
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of a section of a plant cell wall.
In living plant tissue cytoplasmic strands form part of structure W.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Identify the structures labelled W in Fig. 4.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the function of structure W.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Viruses can infect plant cells.
(i) Outline the key structural features of a virus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20
11
(ii) Many plant viruses can travel through the plant to enter companion cells in the phloem
tissue. The viruses then travel with assimilates in the phloem sap to other areas of the
plant.
Explain the mechanism that allows assimilates and viruses to travel through phloem
sieve tubes to other areas of the plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 10]

12
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through the lungs showing a bronchus and some
alveoli.
tissue
Y
tissue
X
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the function of tissue X labelled in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the distribution of tissue X in the trachea differs from that shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe how the epithelial tissue, Y, is adapted for its function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

13
(b) Fig. 5.2 is a photograph of two African elephants, Loxodonta africana.
Fig. 5.2
(i) Describe the difference in surface area to volume ratio between the adult elephant and
baby elephant shown in Fig. 5.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why animals such as elephants require a gas exchange system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

14
(iii) The feet of elephants are protected by structures under the skin known as cushions.
The cushions are made up of a large number of cells surrounded by connective tissue
containing many fibres of collagen. The fibres help to maintain the structure of the
cushion.
The collagen fibres are made of collagen molecules.
Describe the structure of a collagen molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iv) The cushion in the foot is very strong and is able to resist extremely large forces acting
on it due to the large mass of the elephant.
Suggest how the structure of a collagen fibre can help the cushion resist these large
forces.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

15
6 (a) Mutations in body cells can sometimes result in a tumour. Some tumours are cancerous.
(i) Outline how mutations can result in the development of a tumour.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Tumour cells have antigens on their cell surface that are not present on non-tumour
cells.
These antigens are the result of gene mutations and are known as tumour specific
antigens (TSA).
One type of TSA differs in structure from the protein found on the cell surface of
non-tumour cells by a single amino acid.
Explain how a gene mutation could result in the production of this TSA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Question 6 continues on page 16

16
(b) Immunotherapy is a form of treatment for cancer which aims to stimulate the immune system
to destroy tumour cells.
One form of immunotherapy for cancer uses a vaccine which contains one specific type
of TSA.
(i) Describe how vaccination with a specific type of TSA could lead to the destruction of
tumour cells by T-lymphocytes in the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Vaccines that contain tumour cells instead of a TSA are being developed for use during
immunotherapy. Tumour cells are removed from a patient’s body and used in a vaccine
for the patient.
Suggest one advantage and one disadvantage of using a patient’s tumour cells in a
vaccine rather than a TSA.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9700/21/O/N/20

* 2 2 9 5 0 2 5 1 5 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 185256/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram drawn from a photomicrograph of a transverse section through part of a leaf.
The arrows in Fig. 1.1 show the movement of water through the cells of the leaf after it has left the
xylem.
C
B
A
X
P
Y
D
Fig. 1.1
(a) Water from the xylem can enter cell A and then moves to cells B and C without crossing their
cell walls.
The cell structures through which water passes from cell A to cell B are not visible in Fig. 1.1.
(i) Name the cell structures through which water passes from cell A to cell B without
crossing their cell walls.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20
3
(ii) Explain what causes water to move from cell B to cell C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the pathway taken by water between cell A and cell C.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Most of the water that arrives at the leaf passes to the external atmosphere.
With reference to Fig. 1.1, describe and explain the sequence of events occurring between
point P and point Q.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) The actual diameter of cell D in Fig. 1.1 along the length X–Y is 25 µm.
Calculate the magnification of the image.
Write down the formula used to make your calculation. Show your working.
formula
answer = × ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

4
2 The treatment for people with active tuberculosis (TB) lasts six months and involves a combination
of antibiotics. This is usually very effective if the person has a susceptible (non-resistant) strain of
Mycobacterium tuberculosis, the causative organism of TB.
Table 2.1 summarises one recommended treatment strategy that involves a combination of
antibiotics.
Table 2.1
length of
antibiotic mode of action of antibiotic
treatment
enters bacterial cells and inhibits protein
rifampicin (R) 6 months
synthesis
prevents the synthesis of cell wall
isoniazid (H) 6 months
components known as mycolic acids
prevents mycolic acids from being added
ethambutol (E) first two months
to the cell wall
pyrazinamide (Z) first two months prevents the synthesis of fatty acids
(a) Susceptible strains of M. tuberculosis will be killed using any one of the antibiotics listed in
Table 2.1. However, combination treatment is preferred as it is one method that can be used
to reduce the impact to society of antibiotic resistance.
With reference to Table 2.1, explain how combination treatment for TB can help to reduce the
impact of antibiotic resistance compared to single antibiotic treatment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

5
Rifampicin binds tightly to an RNA polymerase molecule close to its active site. This affects the
activity of the enzyme.
(b) (i) RNA polymerase catalyses the formation of messenger RNA (mRNA) from DNA.
State the term for this process.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) During the formation of RNA, a number of events occur that involve the action of RNA
polymerase.
Suggest ways in which rifampicin can affect the activity of RNA polymerase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

6
(c) RNA polymerase is composed of five different polypeptides. Gene rpoB codes for one of
these polypeptides known as the β-subunit.
One or more mutations in a specific region of rpoB result in strains of M. tuberculosis that
are resistant to rifampicin. In these strains, mutations often occur in two DNA triplets in this
region, in positions 526 and 531.
Table 2.2 summarises the results of an investigation into seven rifampicin-resistant strains,
A to G, that have amino acid changes for positions 526 and 531.
Table 2.2 includes:
• the change in the mRNA codon for position 526 or position 531
• the amino acid change that has occurred as a result of the mutation
• the minimum concentration of rifampicin required to inhibit growth of the bacterial
strain (MIC)
• the number of other mutations occurring within the specific region of rpoB.
Table 2.2
Key
. approximately H greater than or equal to G less than or equal to
number of
mRNA
codon amino acid MIC / other mutations
strain codon
involved change µg cm–3 in the specific
change
region
A 526 CAC UAC His Tyr G 50 0
B 526 CAC AAC His Asn H 100 1
C 526 CAC CGC His Arg . 50–75 2
D 526 CAC CGC His Arg H 100 3
E 526 CAC CGC His Arg . 50 3
526 CAC UUC

His ..............
F H 100 3
531 UCG UUG Ser Leu
526 CAC UAC

His ..............
G H 100 3
531 UCG UUC Ser Phe
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

7
(i) Complete Table 2.2 to show the amino acid changes that have occurred in strains
F and G.
[1]
(ii) With reference to Table 2.2, list the strains of M. tuberculosis that show the greatest
resistance to rifampicin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest reasons to explain why strains C, D and E show:
• resistance to rifampicin
• different levels of resistances to rifampicin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 13]

8
3 Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through lung tissue.
ciliated epithelium
magnification × 40
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the feature visible in Fig. 3.1 that identifies the structure in the centre of the image as
the bronchus and list other visible features that help to confirm this identification.
feature to identify the bronchus ................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
other features ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

9
(b) Identify the structure labelled J in Fig. 3.1.
State the evidence visible in Fig. 3.1 that supports your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The ciliated epithelium labelled in Fig. 3.1 consists of goblet cells and ciliated epithelial cells.
Outline how goblet cells and cilia work together to maintain healthy lung tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

10
4 In the immune system, a plasma cell develops from an activated B-lymphocyte. Mature plasma
cells synthesise and secrete antibody molecules.
(a) Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a transmission electron micrograph of a plasma cell.
Fig. 4.1
The plasma cell can be seen in greater detail using an electron microscope compared with
using a light microscope.
(i) Describe the extra detail of the nucleus that can be seen using an electron microscope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why cell structures, such as ribosomes and the rough and smooth endoplasmic
reticulum, cannot be seen using a light microscope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

11
(b) The transition from the activated B-lymphocyte to the fully mature plasma cell requires a
number of mitotic cell cycles to occur. This process, which is known as clonal expansion,
results in a large number of genetically identical plasma cells.
Fig. 4.2 describes events, A to F, that occur during the mitotic cell cycle of the B-lymphocyte.
A centrioles replicate
B DNA polymerase catalyses the formation of phosphodiester bonds
C condensation of chromosomes
D nuclear envelope reassembles around each set of daughter chromosomes
E centromeres move towards poles
F chromosomes line up at spindle equator
Fig. 4.2
Table 4.1 lists the stages occurring during one cell cycle of the B-lymphocyte. These stages
are not in the correct order.
Table 4.1
correct letter
stage of cell cycle
from Fig. 4.2
G2 phase
metaphase F
cytokinesis
prophase
S phase
anaphase
G1 phase
telophase
Complete Table 4.1 by writing the letter of the event described in Fig. 4.2 that correctly
matches the stage of the cell cycle listed.
Leave a blank space if there is no matching description for the stage in the list. Use each
letter once only.
One of the letters in Table 4.1 has already been added for you.
[5]

12
(c) Clonal expansion also results in the production of memory B-lymphocytes.
Explain the importance of clonal expansion and the production of memory B-lymphocytes in
providing protection for a person against an infectious disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Myasthenia gravis is an example of a disease where the immune system fails to distinguish
between self and non-self.
Explain what is meant by this statement.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

13
5 Sucrose phosphorylase is an enzyme found in some species of bacteria. One function of this
enzyme is for the production of compounds that help to protect the cell from harmful osmotic
changes in the external environment.
Fig. 5.1 shows the reversible reaction that takes place within the bacterial cell.
sucrose
phosphorylase
sucrose + Pi α-glucose-1-phosphate + X
inorganic
phosphate reducing
sugar
Fig. 5.1
(a) Name reducing sugar X in Fig. 5.1.
............................................... [1]
(b) In the absence of sucrose phosphorylase as a catalyst, the reaction shown in Fig. 5.1 would
take too long to occur to allow the bacterial cell to function efficiently.
Explain why the reaction shown in Fig. 5.1 proceeds at a much faster rate in the presence of
the enzyme.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

14
(c) An enzyme that catalyses a reaction of commercial interest needs to be investigated to see if
it is suitable for use in industry.
For example:
• immobilised enzymes may be used as they have a longer shelf-life than the enzyme
free in solution
• many industrial reactions are carried out at higher temperatures to minimise
contamination of products by microorganisms.
Fig. 5.2 shows the results of an investigation to compare the activity of sucrose phosphorylase
free in solution (free enzyme) with immobilised sucrose phosphorylase (immobilised enzyme)
at different pHs.
Fig. 5.3 shows the activity of the free enzyme and immobilised enzyme at different
temperatures.
100
80
relative sucrose
phosphorylase
activity
/% 60
40
20
2 4 6 8
pH
Key
free enzyme
immobilised enzyme
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

15
100
80
relative sucrose
phosphorylase
activity
/% 60
40
20
20 40 60 80
temperature / °C
Key
free enzyme
immobilised enzyme
Fig. 5.3
With reference to the results shown in Fig. 5.2 and Fig. 5.3, discuss which sucrose
phosphorylase enzyme, free or immobilised, is better for use in industrial reactions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]

16
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an oxygen dissociation curve for adult human haemoglobin.
100
80
percentage 60
saturation of
haemoglobin 40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
partial pressure
of oxygen / kPa
Fig. 6.1
An increase in the partial pressure of carbon dioxide (pCO2) in respiring tissue causes the
Bohr effect.
(i) Sketch on Fig. 6.1 to show how the Bohr effect changes the oxygen dissociation curve.
[1]
(ii) Explain how an increase in pCO2 produces the Bohr effect and state the benefit of this
effect for the tissue.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

17
(b) Carbon dioxide (CO2) is transported across the cell surface membrane of the red blood cell
using a different mechanism to the transport of hydrogen carbonate ions (HCO3–).
Name the different mechanisms of transport used for CO2 and for HCO3– and explain why
they are transported across the membrane by different mechanisms.
CO2 ...........................................................................................................................................
HCO3– .......................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/22/O/N/20

* 1 1 9 0 3 0 2 1 5 2 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 185257/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a section through the human chest. The gross structure of the human gas exchange
system is shown.
M A
B
K
C
J
H
E
G
Fig. 1.1
(a) Descriptions of some parts of the gas exchange system are shown in Table 1.1.
Complete Table 1.1 to:
• state the name of the part described

• write a letter from Fig. 1.1 to identify each part.
Table 1.1
name of part of gas exchange

description letter from Fig. 1.1
system
supported by incomplete
(C-shaped) rings of cartilage
lined by ciliated epithelium and
supported by blocks of cartilage
lined by squamous epithelium
lined by ciliated epithelium, but

not supported by cartilage
[4]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

3
(b) Tobacco smoke contains a number of compounds which can affect the body.
State the appropriate term that matches each of the statements A to E.
A The type of chemical that causes mutation of genes that control the cell cycle.
...........................................................................................................................................
B A component that causes a short-term increase in blood pressure.
...........................................................................................................................................
C A component that reduces the carrying capacity of haemoglobin for oxygen.
...........................................................................................................................................
D A component that increases the production and secretion of mucus from goblet cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
E A component that causes a short-term increase in heart rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
[5]
[Total: 9]

4
2 The veins of a leaf contain transport tissues. Fig. 2.1 is a drawing made from an electron
micrograph showing a cross-section of the transport tissue in a leaf vein.
The cells labelled A are modified companion cells, known as phloem transfer cells. Transfer
cells move sucrose and other assimilates from mesophyll cells, B, into the phloem sieve tube
element, C.
B
B
C A
B
A B
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

5
(a) State the functions of the mesophyll cells, B, and sieve tube element, C, and explain how
their structure is adapted for their function.
cell B – function ........................................................................................................................
adaptation .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
cell C – function ........................................................................................................................
adaptation .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) The cell walls of the transfer cells, A, shown in Fig. 2.1, have infoldings.
Explain the advantages of these cell wall infoldings for the movement of sucrose from
mesophyll cells to phloem sieve tubes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the nematode worm, Caenorhabditis elegans.
magnification ×
×250
Fig. 3.1
Stem cells of C. elegans have been studied.
Fig. 3.2 shows the change in mass of DNA per nucleus in a stem cell during one cell cycle.
1 pg = 1 × 10–12 g
A B C D cytokinesis
0.18
0.16
0.14
0.12
mass of DNA 0.10

per nucleus / pg
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.00
time
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) State the phases of interphase shown by A and B in Fig. 3.2.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20
7
(ii) State the stage of mitosis shown by D in Fig. 3.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Outline what happens in a cell in preparation for cytokinesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) A stem cell of a female C. elegans has 12 chromosomes.
Complete Table 3.1 to show the number of nuclei within the stem cell in stages A, B
and D of the cell cycle shown in Fig. 3.2 and the number of chromosomes in each
nucleus during these stages.
Table 3.1
stage of the cell cycle
A B D
number of nuclei within the
stem cell
number of chromosomes in
each nucleus
[2]

8
(b) Young nematodes have stem cells throughout the body.
Fig. 3.3 summarises three cell cycles of one of these stem cells.
Key
stem cell
differentiated (specialised) cell not drawn to scale
Fig. 3.3
With reference to Fig. 3.3, outline the role of stem cells in animals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20
9
4 Antibiotic sensitivity tests can be carried out to choose appropriate antibiotics to use for treatment
of bacterial diseases.
A researcher carried out an antibiotic sensitivity test using two pathogenic bacteria, X and Y.
The researcher prepared two Petri dishes containing agar.
• A culture of each bacterium was spread over the surface of the agar.
• Filter paper discs containing antibiotics were placed on the surface of the agar in each dish.
• The Petri dishes were incubated at 25 °C for two days.
The results of the test using three antibiotics, P, Q and R, are shown in Fig. 4.1.
antibiotic P on Petri dish

filter paper discs containing agar
P P
Q R Q R
X Y
Key
bacterial growth
no bacterial growth
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State the most effective antibiotic to treat infections of bacterium X and bacterium Y.
bacterium X .......................................................................................................................
bacterium Y .......................................................................................................................
[1]

10
(ii) Suggest why bacterium Y had a different sensitivity to each of the three antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain how the use of vaccines in the control of infectious diseases differs from the use of
antibiotics.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

11
5 A molecule of collagen consists of three identical polypeptides that form a triple helix.
The amino acid glycine forms one third of the amino acids in a collagen molecule.
Fig. 5.1A shows a polypeptide molecule during protein synthesis. A molecule of glycine is shown
just before it is added to the polypeptide.
H H
N
A
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H O H O
H
rest of polypeptide N C C + N C C
OH H OH
H H H
H H
N
B
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H
rest of polypeptide N C C
H H
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Complete Fig. 5.1B to show the molecule of glycine added to the end of the polypeptide.
[2]
(ii) State the type of reaction that occurs when glycine is added to the end of the polypeptide.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the importance of glycine in a collagen molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
12
(b) Collagen is a fibrous protein.
Explain how the structure of collagen is related to its functions within the mammalian body.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) The enzyme collagenase catalyses the breakdown of collagen molecules. This enzyme acts
by using an induced fit mechanism.
Describe the mode of action of collagenase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

13
(d) Students investigated the effect of pH on the activity of collagenase extracted from the
bacterium Bacillus licheniformis at 50 °C.
100
90
80
70
relative
activity
60
/ percentage
of maximum
50
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
pH
Fig. 5.2
With reference to Fig. 5.2, describe and explain the effect of pH on the activity of collagenase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 18]

14
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows Vorticella, which is a single-celled organism that lives in freshwater. Vorticella
has many cilia which it uses for feeding.
Fig. 6.1
The distance shown by X–Y on Fig. 6.1 is 150 μm.
Calculate the magnification of Fig. 6.1.
State the formula that you will use and show your working.
Write your answer to the nearest whole number.
formula
.......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

15
(b) The food particles are taken into the gullet by a current of water created by movement of cilia.
Any particles suspended in the water, such as bacteria, are taken into the cell as shown in
Fig. 6.2.
infolding of cell
surface membrane
lysosome
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name of the process which takes the bacteria into the cell at Z and describe
the way in which it occurs.
name .................................................................................................................................
description .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Describe the role of lysosomes in intracellular digestion in Vorticella.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 9700/23/O/N/20

* 5 1 5 8 6 5 0 0 7 8 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (MB/SG) 200195/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is an image of a transverse section through the trachea of the gas exchange system.
lumen of trachea
ciliated epithelium
perichondrium
X ........................................................
Y ........................................................
Fig. 1.1
Write the names of structures X and Y on Fig. 1.1 in the boxes provided. [2]
(b) The perichondrium contains collagen fibres, composed of collagen molecules.
Collagen is an example of one type of biological molecule.
State the name of the type of biological molecule of which collagen is an example.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Some structures in the gas exchange system are listed in alphabetical order in Table 1.1.
• Write YES in the box provided if the structure contains smooth muscle.
• Write NO in the box provided if the structure does not contain smooth muscle.
Table 1.1
alveolus
bronchiole
bronchus
trachea
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

3
2 Starch molecules are the main storage molecules in many types of cereal grain, such as the grain
of the barley plant.
(a) When the seed inside a barley grain germinates, genes coding for digestive enzymes are
switched on. The enzymes that are synthesised catalyse the hydrolysis of storage molecules
such as proteins and starch.
(i) Explain what is meant by a gene.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The hydrolysis of proteins in the barley seed produces amino acids that can be used in
the synthesis of the proteins required for formation of the seedling (young plant).
Fig. 2.1 is an incomplete diagram of the molecular structure of the smallest amino acid,
glycine. Each molecule of glycine has two carbon atoms.
C C
Fig. 2.1
Complete Fig. 2.1 to show the molecular structure of glycine. [2]
(iii) Starch is a mixture of two different molecules.
Name these two molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
Two of the enzymes synthesised by the barley seed are α-amylase and maltase. These are
involved in the hydrolysis of the stored starch during seedling formation.
In the food industry, the starch extracted from barley seeds (barley starch) is used in the production
of sugar syrups. Fig. 2.2 summarises the reactions catalysed by α-amylase in the production of
maltose syrup and by maltase in the production of glucose syrup.
α-amylase
barley starch maltose
maltase
maltose glucose
Fig. 2.2
(b) Some of the substances shown in Fig. 2.2 are listed in Table 2.1.
Complete Table 2.1 to identify which of the terms polysaccharide, monosaccharide and
macromolecule apply to each of the substances listed.
Use a tick (3) if the term applies and a cross (7) if the term does not apply.
Put a tick (3) or a cross (7) in every box.
Table 2.1
substance polysaccharide monosaccharide macromolecule

glucose
maltase
maltose
starch
[3]
When producing sugar syrups, there are advantages in using enzymes extracted from
microorganisms.
For example, some enzymes extracted from microorganisms are heat stable. Heat-stable enzymes
are used to increase productivity because the reactions can be carried out at higher temperatures.
(c) Suggest one other advantage of using enzymes obtained from microorganisms, rather than
enzymes extracted from barley seeds, in the production of sugar syrups.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

5
(d) Fig. 2.3 is a graph showing how the activity of a-amylase extracted from barley seeds
changes as the temperature increases from 10 °C to 66 °C.
100
90
80
70
60
percentage
enzyme 50
activity
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
temperature / °C
Fig. 2.3
(i) Explain the effect of temperature on the activity of α-amylase extracted from barley
seeds, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Sketch on Fig. 2.3 the curve that would be obtained using α-amylase enzyme that is
heat stable. [2]
[Total: 14]

6
3 T-helper lymphocytes and Leydig cells are two types of mammalian cells. The main role of T-helper
lymphocytes and Leydig cells is to synthesise and secrete cell-signalling molecules.
• T-helper lymphocytes synthesise proteins known as cytokines.

• Leydig cells synthesise the steroid (lipid) hormone testosterone from cholesterol. Leydig cells
also synthesise cholesterol.
(a) State one way in which cytokines are involved in an immune response.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows part of a mammalian cell.
Fig. 3.1
(i) State, with reasons, whether Fig. 3.1 shows part of a Leydig cell or part of a T-helper
lymphocyte.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21
7
(ii) Underline the correct name for the type of image shown in Fig. 3.1 and explain your
choice.
photomicrograph
scanning electron micrograph
transmission electron micrograph
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Testosterone molecules and cytokine molecules are transported in the circulatory system to
reach their target cells. Testosterone molecules are able to enter their target cells and bind to
receptors within the cytoplasm.
(i) Outline one way in which testosterone molecules could enter their target cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Cytokine molecules are not able to enter their target cells.
Suggest and explain why cytokine molecules are not able to cross the cell surface
membrane to enter their target cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

8
4 (a) Using a light microscope at a magnification of ×400, it is possible to identify different types of
blood cell in prepared slides of mammalian blood.
Fig. 4.1 is a key to identify different types of blood cell in prepared slides of mammalian blood.
In Fig. 4.1, letters C, D, E and F represent four different types of blood cell.
key
1a nucleus present ................................................................................................ go to 2

1b nucleus absent ..................................................................................................... C
2a large rounded (spherical) nucleus ......................................................................... D

2b nucleus not rounded ......................................................................................... go to 3
3a nucleus is kidney shaped ..................................................................................... E

3b nucleus is lobed .................................................................................................... F
Fig. 4.1
(i) Identify the cell types C, D, E and F in Fig. 4.1.
C ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
F ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why blood taken from a person with an infectious disease may have a different
number of white blood cells compared with blood taken from a healthy person.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

9
As part of a research project, a team of doctors and scientists carried out tests to investigate
the effect of altitude on the ability of blood to carry oxygen. They assessed the changes in the
oxygen-carrying ability of their own blood as they walked from 1530 m above sea level to 5700 m
above sea level, over a period of 14 days. 5700 m above sea level is an extremely high altitude.
Table 4.1 is a summary of some of their results.
Table 4.1
day 1 at 1530 m day 14 at 5700 m

percentage saturation of haemoglobin with oxygen in
95 82
blood leaving the lungs
volume of oxygen delivered to tissues by 100 cm3 of
19.3 19.2
blood / cm3
(b) Compare the results for day 1 with the results for day 14 in Table 4.1 and explain the results
shown for day 14.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) The results of the research project have led to an improved understanding of diseases such
as sickle cell anaemia.
Explain why sickle cell anaemia is an example of a disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

10
5 Each meristem cell in a leaf bud is able to grow and divide by mitosis to produce two daughter
cells that are genetically identical to each other and to the original dividing cell.
(a) Fig. 5.1 lists the stages in the mitotic cell cycle of a meristem cell.
G1 phase
S phase
G2 phase
prophase
metaphase
anaphase
telophase
cytokinesis
daughter cell daughter cell
Fig. 5.1
(i) Outline and explain the events occurring during S phase, metaphase and anaphase of
the mitotic cell cycle that are important in the production of genetically identical daughter
cells.
S phase .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
metaphase ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
anaphase ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

11
(ii) Immediately after cytokinesis, daughter cells are not identical even though they are
genetically identical.
Suggest a reason why daughter cells are not identical immediately after cytokinesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Some of the cells resulting from mitotic division in the young leaf form elongated cells that
develop into xylem vessel elements. The xylem vessel elements are joined end to end to
form xylem vessels.
(i) Suggest the structural changes that occur when elongated cells develop into xylem
vessel elements and explain how these changes help xylem vessels to perform their
function in transport.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Fig. 5.2 is a plan diagram of a transverse section through a dicotyledonous leaf.
Fig. 5.2
Add a label line and the letter X to Fig. 5.2 to identify the location of xylem tissue. [1]
[Total: 10]

12
6 In March 2019, a tropical cyclone in the south-west Indian Ocean caused widespread flooding in a
number of countries.
The flooding and the damage caused by the cyclone meant that many people were at serious risk
of cholera.
After the natural disaster occurred, many different areas reported outbreaks of cholera. Within a
short time the disease had spread widely and large numbers of people were affected.
(a) Cholera is caused by a bacterial pathogen.
Name the bacterial pathogen that causes cholera.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest and explain why the people affected by the cyclone were at serious risk of cholera.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

13
(c) In addition to the standard treatment for cholera, antibiotics are recommended for people who
are moderately ill or seriously ill with the disease.
(i) Doxycycline is one of the main antibiotics used for the treatment of cholera.
Doxycycline enters the pathogen and binds to one of the subunits of the bacterial
ribosome. This prevents growth and reproduction of the bacterial cell.
Suggest and explain how binding of doxycycline to ribosomes stops growth of the
bacterial cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Penicillin, which used to be prescribed for the treatment of cholera, has a different
mechanism of action to doxycycline.
State which part of the bacterial cell is affected by the action of penicillin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(d) Mozambique was one of the countries badly affected by the cyclone.
As part of the effort to prevent a greater number of cases of cholera from occurring, two
different approaches were taken.
• Approximately 900 000 doses of the oral cholera vaccine were sent to Mozambique and
a large-scale vaccination programme was organised.
• Medical centres were set up in Mozambique to treat people with cholera.
Suggest and explain how the two different approaches helped to prevent a greater number
of cases of cholera from occurring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/F/M/21

* 4 4 8 5 7 8 8 6 5 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages.
DC (ST/CT) 203278/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of cells from duckweed, Spirodela oligorrhiza.
A
X
C
E D
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the actual width of the cell labelled X.
Write down the formula you will use to make your calculation.
Show your working and give your answer in micrometres to one decimal place.
formula
.................................................... µm [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

3
(b) (i) Table 1.1 lists some biological molecules found in plant cells.
Complete Table 1.1 by choosing one letter from Fig. 1.1 that indicates a cell structure
where each biological molecule is found.
Table 1.1
biological molecule letter from Fig. 1.1
DNA
cellulose
phospholipid
histone proteins
[4]
(ii) State the name of a cell structure, visible in Fig. 1.1, where ATP is synthesised.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name a cell structure that produces mRNA.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe the evidence from Fig. 1.1 that shows that the image is a transmission electron
micrograph.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows three molecules of water.
H H
H H
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe the hydrogen bonding that occurs between the water molecules shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The human enzyme, salivary amylase, is composed of one polypeptide. Fig. 2.2 represents
the structure of a molecule of salivary amylase.
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

5
(i) Explain the role of hydrogen bonding in maintaining the secondary structure of proteins,
such as salivary amylase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain the role of hydrogen bonding in maintaining the tertiary structure of proteins such
as salivary amylase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Outline the importance of water as a solvent in plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Visking tubing can be used to investigate the properties of cell membranes.
A student carried out an experiment to investigate osmosis using Visking tubing. An outline of the
investigation is shown in Fig. 3.1.
measuring rule
(cm / mm)
Visking
tubing
meniscus
sucrose
solution
top of the knot in

Visking tubing 15 cm3 of sucrose
solution (0.9 mol dm–3)
Fig. 3.1
• Six pieces of Visking tubing were filled with 10 cm3 of different concentrations of sucrose
solution: 0.0, 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6 and 2.0 mol dm–3.
• The height of the meniscus of each solution in the Visking tubing was measured.
• The pieces of Visking tubing were put into test-tubes containing 15 cm3 of 0.9 mol dm–3
sucrose solution.
• After 20 minutes, the pieces of Visking tubing were removed from the test-tubes and the
height of the meniscus in each was measured.
The results are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
concentration of sucrose difference in height of

solution inside Visking tubing meniscus after
/ mol dm–3 20 minutes / mm
0.0 –12
0.4 –4
0.8 –2
1.2 +1
1.6 +6
2.0 +11
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

7
(a) The Visking tubing used by the student was not permeable to sucrose.
Explain the results shown in Table 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

8
(b) When red blood cells are placed in water they are destroyed by bursting.
The student also investigated how red blood cells are affected by immersion in solutions of
sodium chloride of different concentration. Blood samples of the same volume were added to
solutions of sodium chloride in separate test-tubes.
After 10 minutes, the student took 0.1 cm3 of the blood samples from the test-tubes and
estimated the percentage of red blood cells that had burst in each blood sample.
Fig. 3.2 shows the student’s results.
100
90
80
70
60
percentage of red blood cells
destroyed by bursting 50
40
30
20
10
0
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
concentration of sodium chloride
solution / mol dm–3
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

9
Describe and explain the effects on red blood cells of immersion in different concentrations of
sodium chloride as shown in Fig. 3.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]

10
4 (a) The induced-fit hypothesis and the lock-and-key hypothesis are used to describe the mode of
action of enzymes.
Explain the induced-fit hypothesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Radish plants contain the enzyme peroxidase that catalyses the breakdown of hydrogen
peroxide.
Students investigated the effect of increasing the concentration of hydrogen peroxide on the
activity of peroxidase extracted from radish.
The results of their investigation are shown in Fig. 4.1.
initial rate of 4
reaction
/ μmol min–1 3
0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60
concentration of hydrogen peroxide / mmol dm–3
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

11
(i) Explain the effect of increasing the concentration of hydrogen peroxide on the initial rate
of reaction as shown in Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The students determined the Km for radish peroxidase as 0.10 mmol dm–3.
With reference to Fig. 4.1, describe how they determined the Km.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A further investigation found that the Km for carbonic anhydrase is 12 mmol dm–3.
Describe the role of carbonic anhydrase in the transport of carbon dioxide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]

12
5 Much success was made in reducing the number of cases of malaria between 2000 and 2015.
(a) Explain how malaria is transmitted.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Diagnostic test strips for malaria contain monoclonal antibodies. The test strips detect
antigens produced by the pathogens that cause malaria.
Fig. 5.1 shows stages in the production of monoclonal antibodies. The information in three of
these stages is incomplete.
Complete Fig. 5.1.
malarial antigen
injected into mouse
immune response
occurs in mouse
specific ..............................................................
divide to form many plasma cells
plasma cells extracted from

myeloma cells
spleen of mouse
plasma cells ......................... with

myeloma cells
formation of ......................... cells
Fig. 5.1
[3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

13
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows two diagnostic test strips for malaria.
MALARIA MALARIA
C C
T T
S S
A A
negative result positive result
Fig. 5.2
• A sample of blood from a person suspected of having malaria is put into the well
labelled S.
• A buffer solution is put into the well labelled A.
• The buffer solution moves the blood towards the results window.
• A line at position C indicates that the test is working correctly.
• A line at position T indicates a positive result for malaria.
State three advantages of using test strips for malaria, such as those shown in Fig. 5.2.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

14
(d) The highest number of cases of malaria occur in sub-Saharan Africa and South-East Asia.
Discuss the factors that determine the global distribution of malaria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

15
6 Lysosomes are cell structures that contain enzymes known as acid hydrolases.
Fig. 6.1 shows some processes that occur in animal cells.
bacterium C
E lysosome
A
not to scale
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the cell structures labelled A and E.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
E ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the function of the structures labelled F.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Name the process by which bacteria are taken into the cell at C.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]

16
(d) With reference to the processes occurring at B and at D in Fig. 6.1, outline the role of acid
hydrolases in lysosomes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Carrier proteins in the membranes of lysosomes maintain a lower pH than the surrounding
cytoplasm by moving hydrogen ions.
Suggest how the carrier proteins maintain the lower pH within the lysosomes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/M/J/21

* 8 8 6 6 5 5 0 3 9 5 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/FC) 200351/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph of a region of eukaryotic tissue. Some of the cells are in stages
of mitosis.
E
F
Fig. 1.1
(i) Identify which stage of mitosis is shown in cell E and in cell F in Fig. 1.1.
E ..............................................
F .............................................. [2]
(ii) Microtubules are present within the cells that are in stages of mitosis, but these are not
visible in Fig. 1.1.
State the function of microtubules in mitosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State, with a reason, whether Fig. 1.1 shows a region of animal or plant tissue.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

3
(b) Semi-conservative replication of DNA occurs during interphase, before mitosis begins.
Write the correct term in the spaces provided to complete each of statements A to D.
A The DNA double helix unwinds and is separated into two template strands when
....................................................................... bonds holding the two strands together
are broken.
B One of the template strands of DNA is copied in fragments. The enzyme
....................................................................... is required to join the fragments together
to form a continuous strand of DNA.
C Complementary DNA nucleotides are added to the template strands, catalysed by the
enzyme ....................................................................... .
D ....................................................................... are regions of repeating nucleotide
sequences at the ends of chromosomes that allow the continued replication of DNA,
without the loss of genes.

[4]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Sugars are transported within phloem sieve tubes from a source, such as a mature leaf, to a
young leaf, which acts as a sink. The young leaf also needs water and dissolved mineral ions,
which arrive at the leaf within xylem vessels.
(a) As the young leaf matures, the quantity of sugar taken up by the leaf decreases to zero, but
the need for water increases.
Suggest and explain why the quantity of sugar taken up by the developing leaf decreases to
zero over time, but the need for water increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The features listed in Table 2.1 are present in one or more of the three cell types:
• companion cell
• phloem sieve tube element
• xylem vessel element.
Complete Table 2.1 using a tick (3) if the feature is present and a cross (7) if the feature is
absent.
Table 2.1
companion phloem sieve xylem vessel

feature
cell tube element element
cytoplasm
lignified cell wall
nucleus
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

5
3 In mammals, some cell signalling molecules are steroid (lipid) hormones. These hormones are
transported in the bloodstream to reach capillary networks.
At a capillary network, hormones pass out of the blood into tissue fluid.
(a) Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of a capillary network.
X body cells
tissue
fluid
blood blood
from to
artery vein
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the differences between the blood arriving at the arterial end of the capillary
network and the tissue fluid surrounding the body cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Not all the tissue fluid passes back into the blood capillaries to enter the bloodstream.
Some of the tissue fluid drains into blind-ended vessels, such as vessel X shown in
Fig. 3.1.
Name the fluid that is formed in vessel X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
Hormone S is a steroid hormone involved in cell signalling.
Fig. 3.2 shows the sequence of events that occurs when hormone S enters a target cell.
hormone-receptor
complex
R
DNA
C
G
nuclear
cell surface envelope
membrane
KEY:
not to scale
hormone S
cell surface membrane receptors
cytoplasmic receptors
nuclear receptor
messenger RNA molecule
polypeptide
Fig. 3.2
(b) Explain why hormone S, shown in Fig. 3.2, does not need to pass through a transport protein
to enter the cytoplasm of the target cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The target cell can respond to other cell signalling molecules in addition to hormone S. The
cell has receptors in the cell surface membrane, in the cytoplasm and in the nucleus.
Explain why hormone S binds only with receptor R in the cytoplasm and not with the other
receptors shown in Fig. 3.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21
7
(d) The hormone-receptor complex shown in Fig. 3.2 enters the nucleus and binds to DNA. This
switches on a gene coding for a polypeptide that is synthesised in the cytoplasm.
(i) Name the structure through which the hormone-receptor complex enters the nucleus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the processes occurring at B and C.
B ........................................................................................................................................
C .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Name structure G.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Cell signalling by hormone S results in the production of a functioning globular protein
molecule composed of three identical polypeptide chains.
After the synthesis of these polypeptides, changes need to occur to form the functioning
globular protein molecule.
Outline the changes that need to occur to form the functioning globular protein molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 15]

8
4 A person who is exposed to tobacco smoke is at greater risk of lung cancer and chronic obstructive
pulmonary disease (COPD).
Many people with COPD have both chronic bronchitis and emphysema. These diseases cause
changes in the gas exchange system. For example, changes occur in the total lung surface area
to volume ratio (SA:V).
(a) Tar in tobacco smoke has a number of effects on the cells lining the gas exchange system.
State the main effects of tar on the cells lining the gas exchange system that are related to
lung cancer and to chronic bronchitis.
lung cancer ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
chronic bronchitis ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

9
(b) A student investigated the effect of SA:V on diffusion.
Agar was prepared with Universal Indicator solution and sodium hydroxide solution. The agar
was coloured blue.
Three cubes, A, B, and C, were cut from a solid block of blue agar. Each cube was a different
size.
Universal Indicator solution changes to a red colour in the presence of acid.
The student prepared Table 4.1 to show the sizes and SA:V of each cube.
Table 4.1
cube length of each total surface volume / SA:V

side / cm area / cm2
.....................
A 1 6 1 6:1
B 2 24 8 3:1
C 3 2:1
Complete Table 4.1 by:

• writing the correct units for volume
• calculating the total surface area, and volume, of cube C.
[2]
(c) Cubes A, B and C were placed in a small beaker. At time 0 seconds, dilute hydrochloric acid
was added to the beaker to cover the cubes.
The student timed how long it took for each cube to change colour completely.
Complete Fig. 4.1 to show the results that were obtained.
shortest time to longest time to

change colour change colour
completely completely
cube ......................... cube ......................... cube .........................

[1]
Fig. 4.1

10
(d) Some people with emphysema may be offered lung volume reduction surgery (LVRS), in
which diseased lung tissue is surgically removed.
One expected outcome of the surgery is an improvement in total lung surface area to volume
ratio (total lung SA:V).
Suggest why there is an improvement in total lung SA:V after the surgery has been carried
out.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) In humans, blood that becomes oxygenated in the lungs reaches body tissues without coming
into contact with blood that is deoxygenated.
Explain how the blood that becomes oxygenated in the lungs is kept separate from blood that
is deoxygenated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

11
5 Fig. 5.1 is a transmission electron micrograph showing parts of two plant cells. The function of the
middle lamella is cell-to-cell adhesion. The middle lamella is composed of a polysaccharide known
as pectin.
Pectin interacts with the polysaccharides cellulose and hemicellulose in the cell walls of the plant
cells so that the cell walls are held close together, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
Golgi body
middle lamella
Fig. 5.1
(a) Cell structure X in Fig. 5.1 is a cytoplasmic channel with strands of cytoplasm passing through
the cell walls of the two cells.
Name cell structure X and state one function of this cell structure.
name .........................................................................................................................................
function .....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Researchers have discovered that pectin is synthesised within the Golgi body. Golgi vesicles
containing pectin are moved to the cell surface membrane for release.
(i) Suggest why researchers would not have investigated ribosomes as being the possible
location for the synthesis of pectin.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the mechanism that is used to transport pectin out of the cell.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

12
Juices that are extracted commercially from fruits can be made less cloudy by the breakdown of
the cell wall using the enzymes cellulase, pectinase and xylanase:
• cellulase hydrolyses cellulose

• pectinase hydrolyses pectin
• xylanase hydrolyses hemicellulose.
(c) Fig. 5.2 is a graph showing the effect of cellulose concentration on the activity of cellulase,
which is used in making fruit juice less cloudy.
300
240
rate of reaction 180

/ mg product
cm–3 min–1 120
60
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
cellulose concentration / mg cm–3
Fig. 5.2
Describe and explain the curve shown in Fig. 5.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

13
(d) Ultrasound is one possible method that can be used to destroy microorganisms that
contaminate fruit juices. Ultrasound is the term given to sound waves that are out of the range
of human hearing.
An investigation was carried out into the effect of ultrasound on the activity of cellulase,
pectinase and xylanase used in fruit juice manufacture.
For each enzyme, the effect of ultrasound was compared with no ultrasound on the:
• maximum rate of reaction (Vmax)
• Michaelis-Menten constant (Km)
• catalytic efficiency (Vmax / Km)
Table 5.1 summarises the results. A higher Vmax / Km indicates a higher catalytic efficiency.
Table 5.1
comparison comparison Vmax / Km

enzyme method
of Vmax of Km / min–1
ultrasound higher higher 34
cellulase
no ultrasound lower lower 29
ultrasound same lower 945
pectinase
no ultrasound same higher 759
ultrasound higher same 146
xylanase
no ultrasound lower same 125
(i) In terms of changes in the interaction between enzyme and substrate when ultrasound
is used, suggest explanations for the lower Km for pectinase and the higher Vmax for
xylanase, as shown in Table 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain whether the data shown in Table 5.1 supports the recommendation that
ultrasound can be used in the manufacture of fruit juices.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
14
6 The diseases myasthenia gravis (MG) and HIV/AIDS both involve disorders of the immune system.
(a) The cause of MG involves a response by B-lymphocytes.
Explain why MG is called a disorder of the immune system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Studies have indicated that T-lymphocytes are involved in stimulating the B-lymphocyte
response that causes MG.
Research has been carried out on a vaccine that will provide a person with active immunity
against these T-lymphocytes and B-lymphocytes.
Suggest and explain how this vaccine will provide a person with active immunity against the
T-lymphocytes and B-lymphocytes responsible for causing MG.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Many people who are living with HIV (infected with HIV) develop tuberculosis (TB). If a person
does not have any symptoms of TB, one preventive measure is to prescribe antibiotics. This
reduces the overall number of cases of TB and deaths from TB.
State the disadvantage of prescribing antibiotics as a preventive measure against TB.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

15
(d) Fig. 6.1 is a summary of some of the statistics published by UNAIDS (Joint United Nations
Programme on HIV and AIDS) about HIV and HIV/AIDS for the year 2017.
The figures shown in Fig. 6.1 for 2017 are estimated.
globally, 36.9 million

people were living
with HIV
1.8 million people

became infected with
HIV
35.1 million adults and
1.8 million children
(under 15 years)
21.7 million were
provided with ART
(antiretroviral therapy)
940 000 people died
from HIV/AIDS
47% of the people provided with

ART, while still living with HIV, do
not have detectable levels of the
virus in their blood
Fig. 6.1
One other statistic published by UNAIDS indicated that, in 2017, only 75% of the estimated
36.9 million people living with HIV knew that they had been infected with the virus.
With reference to the information in Fig. 6.1, discuss the importance of this statistic.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/M/J/21

* 1 9 9 1 9 8 2 4 4 0 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (DH/CB) 200350/2
2
1 The Golgi body, rough endoplasmic reticulum (RER) and smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER)
form part of the internal membrane system of a cell. The membranes have a fluid mosaic structure.
Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of one area of a liver cell showing a region with
RER and a region with SER. Mitochondria are also visible in the image.
mitochondria
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the differences in structure and function between RER and SER.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Phospholipids are one of the main components of membranes.
Describe the structure of a phospholipid molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21
3
(c) One function of a Golgi body is to package molecules into Golgi vesicles.
(i) A Golgi body and Golgi vesicles are not visible in Fig. 1.1.
Describe the features, other than the presence of Golgi vesicles, that would help you
identify a Golgi body in a transmission electron micrograph of another area of the same
liver cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Some Golgi vesicles contain secretory proteins for release from the cell.
Describe the sequence of events that occurs following the packaging of a secretory
protein into a Golgi vesicle to its release from the cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Some Golgi vesicles contain glycoproteins or glycolipids to be added to the cell surface
membrane.
Outline the role of glycolipids in the cell surface membrane.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 Smallpox, measles and HIV/AIDS are infectious diseases caused by different viruses. These
different viruses share some structural features.
(a) State one structural feature that would confirm that a pathogen is a virus.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The virus that causes smallpox belongs to a different genus to the virus that causes measles.
Name the viruses that cause these diseases.
smallpox ...................................................................................................................................
measles .............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Explain why antibiotics, such as penicillin, cannot be used to treat measles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Antibiotics may be prescribed for a person with HIV/AIDS.
Suggest why antibiotics may be prescribed for a person with HIV/AIDs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

5
(e) Smallpox is the only infectious disease of humans that has been globally eradicated. This
eradication was due mainly to a successful global vaccination programme. Most people who
were given the vaccine gained immunity to the disease.
A student correctly listed four reasons for the success of the global vaccination programme
for smallpox. These reasons are listed in Fig. 2.1.
• The virus did not mutate.

• A live virus, closely related to the smallpox virus, was used in the vaccine.
• The vaccine was freeze-dried and so was thermostable (heat stable).
• The vaccine was easy to administer (give), so little training was required.
Fig. 2.1
(i) Discuss how the reasons listed in Fig. 2.1 contributed to the success of the eradication
of smallpox.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Table 2.1 lists four types of immunity.
Complete each row of Table 2.1 with a tick (3) or a cross (✗) to summarise the types of
immunity gained by a person who received the smallpox vaccine.
Table 2.1
type of immunity gained (3)

not gained (✗)
active immunity
artificial immunity
natural immunity
passive immunity
[1]
[Total: 11]
6
3 HIV protease is an enzyme composed of two identical polypeptide chains. Each polypeptide chain
is 99 amino acids long. During translation, the amino acids are joined by peptide bonds to form the
polypeptide chain.
(a) Describe how a polypeptide of HIV protease is produced by the process of translation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The synthesised polypeptide has a primary protein structure and can form a tertiary protein
structure after translation. There are more bond types in the tertiary structure.
Compare the peptide bond formed during translation with the types of bond made during
tertiary structure formation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

7
(c) Some polypeptides are translated as part of one long polyprotein chain. After translation,
enzymes cut the polyprotein into separate functioning proteins.
HIV protease cuts a polyprotein that has been produced within the host cells of actively
replicating HIV. The separate proteins are required in the replication of the virus.
Fig. 3.1 shows how the two polypeptide chains of HIV protease form an enzyme with an
active site enclosed by flaps, forming the flap region.
flap region
active
site
Fig. 3.1
(i) The flap region of HIV protease is flexible.
With reference to Fig. 3.1, suggest and explain how the mechanism of action of HIV
protease can be described as an induced fit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Indinavir is one of the therapeutic drugs used in HIV anti-retroviral therapy (ART). It is
similar to the polyprotein substrate of HIV protease.
Suggest and explain how indinavir acts as a therapeutic drug.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
8
4 Phloem sap is transported within phloem sieve tubes.
(a) Monosaccharides and disaccharides are transported as part of phloem sap, but
polysaccharides are not components of phloem sap.
Define the terms disaccharide and polysaccharide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Sieve tubes are composed of phloem sieve tube elements.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of one sieve tube element and its companion cell.
Some of the structural features of the sieve tube element have not been included in the
diagram.
companion cell
phloem sieve
tube element
Fig. 4.1
(i) Complete Fig. 4.1 by drawing and labelling the structural features of the sieve tube
element that have not been included in the diagram. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

9
(ii) A pressure gradient in a sieve tube causes the mass flow of phloem sap from the source
to the sink.
At the source, a decrease in water potential in the phloem sap and an increase in the
hydrostatic pressure of the phloem sap can be measured.
Describe the events that cause each of these changes in the phloem sap.
decrease in water potential ...............................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
increase in hydrostatic pressure .......................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows four types of cell that can be seen in a prepared slide of blood taken from a
mammal.
............................................... ...............................................
...............................................
...............................................
Fig. 5.1
Identify the four types of cell shown in Fig. 5.1.
Write the name of the cell type on the answer line provided by each cell in Fig. 5.1. [4]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

11
(b) During systole and diastole of the cardiac cycle, changes in blood pressure occur in the four
chambers of the heart.
Fig. 5.2 shows changes in the blood pressure in the left side of the heart and the aorta during
one cardiac cycle.
16
14
12
10
blood 8
pressure
/ kPa 6
–2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
time / s
Fig. 5.2
With reference to the blood pressure changes shown in Fig. 5.2:
• state the maximum blood pressure reached in the left ventricle .......... kPa
• state the time at which the bicuspid (left atrioventricular) valve closes. ....... s
[2]

12
(c) Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) can cause a condition known as pulmonary
hypertension. This involves an increase in systolic blood pressure in the right ventricle and in
the pulmonary arteries.
Fig. 5.3 is a summary of some of the events that can result from COPD.
COPD
chronic alveolar hypoxia
blood vessels leading to gas

exchange areas decrease in
lumen diameter (pulmonary
vasoconstriction)
pulmonary loss of alveolar

hypertension capillaries
Fig. 5.3
(i) Chronic alveolar hypoxia describes a condition where the partial pressure of oxygen in
the gas exchange regions of the lungs is always lower than normal.
Explain how COPD leads to chronic alveolar hypoxia.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain how the loss of alveolar capillaries affects the functioning of the lungs in a person
with COPD.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21
13
BLANK PAGE

14
6 The best time to obtain a clear image of chromosomes during a mitotic cell cycle is during the
metaphase stage.
Fig. 6.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of a group of human chromosomes at metaphase.
B
A
Fig. 6.1
(a) The group of chromosomes shown in Fig. 6.1 is magnified many times.
The actual width of the human chromosome between A—B is 1400 nm.
Calculate the magnification of the scanning electron micrograph shown in Fig. 6.1.
magnification × ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

15
(b) Draw chromosome C in Fig. 6.1 in the space provided.
Label your drawing to show the structure of the chromosome.
[4]
(c) Suggest why the metaphase stage is the best time during a mitotic cell cycle to obtain a clear
image of chromosomes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Name the stage of mitosis that immediately follows metaphase.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/M/J/21

* 5 7 7 4 5 9 6 9 7 0 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/CT) 203277/2
2
Answer all the questions.
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of cells from the leaf of a plant.
Fig. 1.1
(i) Name the cell structures X, Y, and Z.
X ......................................................................................................................................
Y ......................................................................................................................................
Z ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State two ways in which the structure of an animal cell differs from plant cells such as
those shown in Fig. 1.1.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

3
(b) (i) Cell structure Y in Fig. 1.1 contains a large starch granule (grain).
Name the chemical reagent used to test for starch and state the colour change that will
be seen if starch is present.
reagent ..............................................................................................................................
colour change .............................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Starch granules contain amylose and amylopectin.
Describe the similarities and differences between the structure of amylose and the
structure of amylopectin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a transverse section through a blood capillary
that is surrounded by actively respiring cells.
fluid R
cell Q
Fig. 2.1
(i) Identify cell Q shown in Fig. 2.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fluid R is formed from blood in the blood capillary.
State and explain one difference between the composition of fluid R and the composition
of the blood in the capillary.
difference ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

5
(b) (i) The cell surface membranes of the respiring cells have a role in regulating the exchange
of substances between the cells of the body and the blood.
Draw a diagram in the space below to show the arrangement of phospholipid molecules
in the cell surface membrane.
[2]
(ii) Cholesterol is a molecule found in the cell surface membrane.
Describe one role of cholesterol in the cell surface membrane.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Nicotine is one of the components of tobacco smoke. Nicotine can cross cell surface
membranes and enter the bloodstream.
(i) Describe the short-term effects of nicotine on the cardiovascular system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
(ii) Nicotine is absorbed from the blood plasma into the cells of the capillary wall. Scientists
have suggested that nicotine is transported from the blood plasma into these cells using
a type of co-transporter mechanism.
Fig. 2.2 shows how nicotine may be transported from the blood plasma into a cell.
H+ ions move down their

concentration gradient
blood plasma out of the cell
cell surface
membrane
cytoplasm co-transport protein

nicotine is transported
of the cell
against its concentration
gradient into the cell
Fig. 2.2
The co-transporter mechanism shown in Fig. 2.2 is different from the co-transporter
mechanism that moves sucrose into the cytoplasm of a companion cell in phloem tissue.
Outline the similarities and differences between the co-transport of nicotine and the
co-transport of sucrose.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

7
Question 3 starts on page 8.

8
3 Cholera is an infectious disease caused by the bacterial pathogen Vibrio cholerae.
(a) Describe how V. cholerae is transmitted from an infected person to an uninfected person.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
V. cholerae releases a toxin called choleragen. Choleragen is a protein molecule made up of six
polypeptides (subunits).
(b) Fig. 3.1 is a ribbon diagram of a molecule of choleragen.
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

9
Describe what is shown by the part of the molecule labelled T.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Vaccination can be used to prevent the spread of cholera. The vaccine used contains part of
the choleragen molecule and also contains dead cells of V. cholerae.
(i) Phagocytes play an important role in the immune response to a vaccine. Phagocytes
contain many lysosomes.
Describe the function of lysosomes in phagocytes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest the advantage of having a vaccine that includes dead cells of V. cholerae and
part of the choleragen molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(d) The World Health Organization states that most cases of cholera can be treated with oral
rehydration therapy. To reduce the risk of antibiotic resistance developing, antibiotics are only
recommended for the most serious cases.
Discuss the consequences of the development of antibiotic resistance in V. cholerae.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

11

12
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a drawing made by a student of a plant cell, showing one of the stages of mitosis.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Describe the role of the spindle during this stage of mitosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The chromosomes are composed of DNA.
Describe the structure of a monomer of a DNA molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

13
(b) Telomeres are located at the ends of each chromosome.
Telomeres progressively shorten each time a healthy human cell divides, until the cell is no
longer able to divide.
Stem cells have an enzyme called telomerase that prevents the telomeres shortening during
the cell cycle.
(i) Suggest why telomerase activity is important in stem cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why tumour cells produce high concentrations of telomerase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Scientists have researched the possibility of treating cancer by inhibiting the action of
telomerase.
One method that has been studied involves inserting small, single-stranded DNA into
cancer cells. These sections of DNA have a base sequence that is complementary to a
section of the mRNA transcribed from the gene coding for telomerase.
Explain how inserting small, single-stranded DNA could prevent translation of the mRNA
to produce telomerase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

14
5 A student investigated the effects of air movement on the rate of transpiration by using a potometer.
(a) Define the term transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The potometer used by the student is shown in Fig. 5.1.
water leafy shoot

reservoir
screw clip
air bubble
scale
Fig. 5.1
The student recorded the distance the air bubble in the apparatus had moved after ten
minutes with no air movement.
The rate of water uptake was used as a measure of the rate of transpiration.
The apparatus was then reset using the reservoir, and the experiment was repeated a further
two times. All other variables were standardised during the three experiments.
Table 5.1 shows the results recorded by the student.
Table 5.1
experiment distance moved by the bubble in 10 minutes / mm
1 12.5
2 12.0
3 11.5
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

15
(b) Use Table 5.1 to calculate the mean rate of movement of the bubble.
............................ mm min–1 [1]
(c) The student carried out another experiment using the same plant. In this experiment a fan
was used to blow air across the leaves of the plant. All other variables were standardised.
The results showed that the bubble moved further in 10 minutes.
The student concluded that air movement increases the rate of transpiration.
Explain why air movement increases the rate of transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Explain how water moves up through a xylem vessel in the stem of the plant in the potometer,
shown in Fig. 5.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 9]

16
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of sections through the heart showing two stages of the cardiac cycle,
A and B.
Stage A Stage B
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name stage B in Fig. 6.1 and state one piece of evidence from the diagram that supports
your answer.
stage B .....................................................................................................................................
evidence ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Draw a label line on Fig. 6.1 to identify one semilunar valve. Label the valve S. [1]
(ii) Describe the role of the semilunar valves in the cardiac cycle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021 9700/21/O/N/21

* 1 6 2 7 2 5 3 4 4 9 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/SW) 203849/2
2
1 There are two types of cell, prokaryotic and eukaryotic. Bacterial cells are prokaryotic and plant
cells are eukaryotic.
(a) There are differences in the structural features that are common to bacterial cells and plant
cells. For example, the cell surface membrane in a plant cell contains cholesterol, but in
a bacterial cell the membrane contains molecules known as hopanoids. Cholesterol and
hopanoids have the same function.
Some of the main structural features common to both types of cell are shown in Table 1.1.
Complete Table 1.1 by giving one difference between a bacterial cell and a plant cell for each
structural feature listed.
The difference between the cell surface membranes of the two types of cell has been
completed for you.
Table 1.1
feature common
to bacterial and bacterial cell plant cell
plant cells
cell surface
contains hopanoids contains cholesterol
membrane
ribosome
DNA
cell wall
[3]
(b) One role of the cell surface membrane of bacterial cells and plant cells is the transport of
substances into and out of cells.
Explain how membrane carrier proteins and membrane channel proteins are involved in the
transport of substances into and out of cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21
3
(c) Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph showing chloroplasts in plant leaf cells.
chloroplasts
Fig. 1.1
Explain why the chloroplasts are seen only around the periphery (edge) of each plant cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Fig. 1.2 shows plant cells in a root tip where cell division by mitosis is taking place.
Fig. 1.2
Identify two cells in Fig. 1.2 that are in different stages of mitosis.
Draw a label line to each cell and add the name of the stage of mitosis that is shown by the
cell. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 The high blood pressure at the arterial end of a capillary network results in some components of
blood leaving the capillaries and forming tissue fluid. At the venous end, the presence of plasma
proteins allows movement of water by osmosis back into the capillaries.
Fig. 2.1 is a diagram showing a capillary network. The lymph vessels and the blood vessels at the
arterial and venous ends of the network are also shown.
capillaries
tissue
fluid
body
cells lymph
vessel
Fig. 2.1
(a) Red blood cells and plasma proteins, such as albumin, remain in the capillaries and are not
found in tissue fluid.
Explain why red blood cells and albumin do not leave the capillary.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name the chemical reagent or reagents used to test for proteins in a sample of blood plasma
and state the colour change that will be seen if protein is present.
reagent or reagents ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
colour change ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

5
(c) When a person moves from sea level and stays at high altitude for a few months, there is an
increase in the number of red blood cells per mm3 of blood.
Explain why this increase occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) A low blood albumin concentration can lead to a condition known as oedema.
Oedema is a swelling of tissues caused by the accumulation of tissue fluid surrounding the
body cells in the capillary network.
Suggest and explain how a low blood albumin concentration can lead to oedema.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Albumin transports some cell signalling molecules from the cells where they are synthesised
to their target cells. The cell signalling molecules bind to specific cell surface membrane
proteins on the target cells.
Name the type of membrane protein to which the cell signalling molecules bind.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]

6
3 Baculovirus is a virus that kills some of the insect pests of major crops. When the virus is released
to the outside of the insect body, it is contained within stable, protective structures known as
polyhedrons.
The main component of the polyhedron is a protein molecule, polyhedrin.
Polyhedrons can be sprayed onto plants as a bioinsecticide. They are ingested by feeding insect
larvae and once inside the insect gut they break down to release the virus.
(a) Explain why the term infectious disease can be used to describe the effect of baculovirus on
insects.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest and explain the conditions present in the insect gut that can cause the breakdown of
polyhedrons.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A polyhedrin molecule is composed of three identical polypeptides. Each polypeptide is 245
amino acids long. The first 10 amino acids of the polypeptide are shown in Fig. 3.1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
met — pro — asp — tyr — ser — tyr — arg — pro — thr — ile —
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 A is a ribbon diagram of a single polypeptide. Fig. 3.2 B shows a polyhedrin molecule
composed of 3 polypeptides.
The two diagrams are not to the same scale.
A B
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21
7
With reference to Fig. 3.1 and Fig. 3.2, describe the structure of a polyhedrin molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) The sequence of DNA nucleotides for the gene in baculovirus that codes for the polyhedrin
polypeptide has been determined.
Explain why the amino acid sequence of the polypeptide cannot be used to deduce this
sequence of nucleotides in the gene that codes for the polyhedrin polypeptide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]

8
4 Barlinka is a variety of the common grapevine, Vitis vinifera. Barlinka grapes are used for making
wine and are sold as fruit. There are economic and ecological benefits from using less water to
irrigate grapevine plants, while still producing a high crop yield.
The rate of flow of sap within xylem vessels from roots to leaves can be used as an estimate of the
rate of transpiration. This also indicates water uptake.
(a) The hydrogen bonding of water molecules is important in the transport of sap within xylem
vessels.
State the terms used to describe:

• water molecules sticking together within the xylem vessel
................................................................
• water molecules sticking to the cellulose molecules in the lining of the xylem vessel
................................................................
[2]
(b) An experiment was carried out to investigate the effect of leaf area on the rate of flow of the
xylem sap during fruit development.
The flow rate was measured over a three-day period in three Barlinka grapevine plants with
different total leaf area. The plants were growing in the same conditions.
Key
leaf area grapevine 1 / 13.7 m2
400
300
flow rate of
xylem sap /
cm3 per plant
200
per hour
100
0
1 2 3
day
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21
9
(i) The general pattern of results in Fig. 4.1 is the same for the three Barlinka grapevines.
Explain why the general pattern of results is the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 4.1, explain the differences in the results between the three
grapevines, 1, 2 and 3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest an explanation for the decrease in flow rate of xylem sap shown at time P in
Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Outline how you would determine the surface area of one side of a leaf.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 The causative organism of measles is Morbillivirus. Young children who have not been vaccinated
for measles are at highest risk of becoming ill and of developing complications associated with the
disease.
(a) The genetic material of Morbillivirus is a strand of RNA.
Statements A, B and C relate to the structure of RNA.
State the correct term or terms to match each of statements A to C.
A The names of the two purines and two pyrimidines in RNA.
purines .....................................................................
.....................................................................
pyrimidines .....................................................................
.....................................................................
B The type of covalent bond between RNA nucleotides.
.....................................................................
C The pentose sugar of the RNA nucleotide.
.....................................................................
[4]
(b) Describe how measles is transmitted.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

11
(c) Young children with measles may develop difficulties with breathing. This is made worse if the
child is continually exposed to tobacco smoke. Tobacco smoke contains harmful compounds,
such as carbon monoxide.
(i) Inhaled tobacco smoke passes through the larynx (voice box) and other structures in the
gas exchange system to reach the alveoli.
Complete Fig. 5.1 to list, in the correct sequence, the main structures of the gas exchange
system through which the tobacco smoke passes to reach the alveoli.
larynx
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
alveoli
Fig. 5.1
[1]
(ii) State the short-term effects of carbon monoxide on the cardiovascular system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

12
(d) Smallpox is a disease that has been eradicated with the help of a global vaccination
programme. Measles has not been eradicated, even though there is a global vaccination
programme.
Fig. 5.2 is a graph showing the estimates of number of deaths from measles globally, between
2000 and 2017, for people who have not been vaccinated.
2.0
1.5
number of
deaths from
measles in 1.0
millions
0.5
0.0
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
year
Fig. 5.2
(i) State the trend shown in Fig. 5.2 between 2000 and 2017.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

13
(ii) Suggest reasons for the trend shown in Fig. 5.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) A child with leukaemia is at high risk of developing measles even though the child has a high
white blood cell count and has been vaccinated against the disease.
Explain why this child is at high risk of developing measles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]

14
6 Amylase is an enzyme that catalyses the hydrolysis of starch into reducing sugars.
A student carried out an experiment to investigate the hydrolysis of starch using immobilised
amylase. Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the apparatus that was used in the investigation.
starch
solution
tap
immobilised
amylase
in alginate beads
tap
beaker for
collecting
product
Fig. 6.1
The alginate beads were all the same size.
Both taps were opened to allow the starch solution to flow down the column and for the product to
be collected.
The product was tested for the presence of reducing sugar and starch.
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

15
(a) The results of the investigation showed that the product collected in the beaker contained
reducing sugar and starch.
With reference to Fig. 6.1, describe a method that would allow the student to use the
immobilised amylase to collect a product that contains only reducing sugar.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) One standardised variable in the investigation is the size of the alginate beads.
Suggest one reason why using larger or smaller alginate beads in the column would affect
the results obtained.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/22/O/N/21

* 1 6 9 5 8 0 4 3 7 0 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/FC) 211605/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram showing a stage in protein synthesis.
E
D
C A G C A U U U C A C G A C G
C A G A A C
A C G A
Not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the stage of protein synthesis that is shown in Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify A, B and C in Fig. 1.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) State the base sequences at D and E.
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

3
(b) Mutagenesis is a process that leads to a change in the amino acid sequences of proteins.
Scientists carry out mutagenesis to investigate the importance of particular amino acids in
protein structure and function.
Outline how changing one amino acid in the β-globin polypeptide of haemoglobin may change
the structure and function of a molecule of haemoglobin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Pepsin is an enzyme that hydrolyses proteins (protease). Some students used pepsin from the
stomach of a mammal.
The activity of the pepsin was investigated by placing a small quantity of the enzyme with a known
concentration of the protein albumen.
Fig. 2.1 shows the progress of the enzyme-catalysed reaction that was carried out at 20 °C.
10
6
concentration
of product 5
/ μmol dm–3
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / min
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the initial rate of the reaction.
initial rate of reaction = ......................................................... [2]
(b) (i) The procedure was repeated to find the effects on the activity of the pepsin using a
competitive inhibitor at the same temperature, 20 °C.
Predict the results that will be obtained using the competitive inhibitor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

5
(ii) The procedure was repeated without the competitive inhibitor but at the higher
temperature of 30 °C.
Predict the results that will be obtained at 30 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The students extended their investigation by using pepsin from a different species of mammal.
The experiments were carried out at 20 °C and without a competitive inhibitor.
With reference to Fig. 2.1, explain the advantage of calculating the initial rate of reaction in
each experiment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

7
3 Fig. 3.1 is a transmission electron micrograph showing red blood cells in a capillary of a healthy
adult.
magnification = ×4000
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Explain how the cells in the capillary shown in Fig. 3.1 can be identified as red blood
cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Capillaries are surrounded by tissue fluid.
Outline the ways in which the composition of tissue fluid differs from blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) Scientists compared features of the physiology of three groups of people who live at different
altitudes. These people were selected from populations that have lived at these altitudes for
many thousands of years.
The scientists took blood samples from people in each location and measured:
• the concentration of haemoglobin in the blood

• the percentage saturation of haemoglobin with oxygen in blood leaving the lungs
• the oxygen concentration in the blood leaving the lungs.
Table 3.1
altitude / m location of mean mean percentage mean oxygen

group of haemoglobin saturation of concentration in
people concentration in haemoglobin blood leaving
blood / g 100 cm–3 with oxygen in the lungs
blood leaving the / cm3 100 cm–3
lungs
100 Peru 15.3 97.0 21.1
(near sea level)
3500 East Africa 15.6 95.5 21.1
mountains
3750 – 4000 Andes 19.1 92.0 22.0
mountains
(i) Describe the changes in mean percentage saturation of haemoglobin with oxygen and
the mean haemoglobin concentration in blood as altitude increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

9
(ii) With reference to Table 3.1, suggest how the people living at high altitude can have an
oxygen concentration in blood leaving the lungs similar to that of the people living at sea
level.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

10
4 In thale cress, Arabidopsis thaliana, most of the stomata are on the lower surface of the leaves.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of an open stoma and two guard cells. Some of the cellulose fibres in the cell
wall of the guard cells are shown.
stomatal opening
cellulose fibres
Fig. 4.1
(a) The cellulose fibres shown in Fig. 4.1 are composed of bundles of cellulose microfibrils.
Explain how molecules of cellulose are arranged into a microfibril.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

11
(b) The width of stomatal openings in A. thaliana is regulated by movement of ions. These ions
move through channel proteins in the cell surface membranes of the guard cells.
(i) Draw a diagram to show part of a cell surface membrane with a channel protein.
Label your diagram.
[3]
(ii) Explain why channel proteins are needed for the movement of ions into and out of cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The outward movement of ions from guard cells causes stomata to close.
A variety of A. thaliana does not have channel proteins for the outward movement of ions in
the cell surface membranes of the guard cells.
Suggest and explain the effect of not having these channel proteins on transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
12
5 Measles is a highly infectious disease. The World Health Organization (WHO) has coordinated a
programme for controlling this disease by using vaccination.
(a) (i) Name the pathogen that causes measles.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how the measles pathogen is transmitted.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

13
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows the number of cases of measles globally each month between January 2015
and March 2019.
number
of cases
75 000
70 000
65 000
60 000
55 000
50 000
45 000
40 000
35 000
30 000
25 000
20 000
15 000
10 000
5000
0
J FMAM J J ASOND J FMAM J J ASOND J FMAM J J ASOND J FMAM J J ASOND J FM
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019

months
Fig. 5.1
Describe the pattern of measles cases as shown in Fig. 5.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

14
(c) Explain why measles has not yet been eradicated even though a vaccine has been available
since the 1960s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

15
6 (a) Table 6.1 compares some of the features of DNA with the protein collagen.
Complete Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
feature DNA collagen

elements CHON
monomers
bond between monomers
site of production in nucleus
eukaryotic cells
[6]
(b) Most of the DNA in a eukaryotic cell is located in the nucleus.
State how the structure of a nucleus is suited to its function of containing DNA.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fibroblast cells produce elastic fibres and collagen fibres in lung tissue.
Describe the function of elastic fibres in lung tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Name the stage of the cell cycle during which DNA and proteins are synthesised.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 9700/23/O/N/21

* 6 9 5 9 5 8 6 3 1 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/CT) 303956/4
2
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

3
1 (a) Table 1.1 shows three of the processes by which substances in solution can move across cell
membranes. It also lists five statements that may apply to each of these three processes.
Complete Table 1.1 to show which of the statements apply to each of the three processes
shown.
Use a tick (3) to show that the statement applies or a cross (✗) to show that the statement
does not apply.
Each box must contain a tick or a cross.
Table 1.1
process
statement active facilitated simple
transport diffusion diffusion
movement of oxygen into a red blood cell ✗ ✗ 3
occurs in both animal and plant cells
uses carrier proteins
movement of non-polar molecules between the fatty

acid tails of the phospholipid molecules
movement of ions down a concentration gradient

[4]

4
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a simplified diagram representing a transverse section of part of a young root. The
diagram is not to scale.
(i) On Fig. 1.1 draw a label line and label with the letter C to identify the Casparian strip. [1]
soil particles xylem vessel
root hair cell
key
pathway for the movement of water
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Root hairs measure approximately 5 μm in diameter and 500 μm in length.
Explain how this adapts root hairs for the absorption of water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the pathway for the movement of water shown by the arrows in Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

5
(c) Water enters the xylem vessels shown in Fig. 1.1.
Explain how water moves up the xylem vessels to the leaves in a continuous column.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]

6
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a cell at one of the main stages of mitosis in the mitotic cell cycle.
Fig. 2.1
(i) Name the stage of mitosis shown in Fig. 2.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 2.2 shows the cell in Fig. 2.1 at the start of cytokinesis.
Complete Fig. 2.2 to show the daughter chromosomes in each nucleus.
nuclear
envelopes
forming
Fig. 2.2
[2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

7
(b) State the role of telomeres during DNA replication.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Multiple myeloma is a type of cancer in the bone marrow where some of the stem cells start
to produce abnormal blood cells.
• One treatment is to collect stem cells from the bone marrow of the person with multiple
myeloma. Healthy stem cells are isolated and grown in the laboratory.
• Radiation is then used to destroy all stem cells and cancerous cells in the bone marrow.
• Finally, large numbers of the healthy stem cells grown in the laboratory are returned to
the bone marrow.
Suggest the role of stem cells in this treatment of multiple myeloma.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]

8
3 (a) Enzymes are polymers of amino acids.
Complete Fig. 3.1 to show the general structure of an amino acid.
C C N
O
H
Fig. 3.1
[1]
(b) When bananas are peeled, the exposed tissue gradually turns brown in the presence
of oxygen in the air. This is due to an enzyme called catechol oxidase, which acts on the
substrate catechol. Catechol and catechol oxidase are present in the banana tissue.
The overall reaction is shown in Fig. 3.2.
catechol oxidase
catechol melanin
(colourless) oxygen (brown)
Fig. 3.2
A student investigated how the concentration of catechol oxidase affects the rate of this
reaction. All other variables were kept constant throughout the investigation.
For each concentration of catechol oxidase used, the student mixed catechol oxidase solution
with catechol and recorded the time taken for the mixture to reach a standard brown colour.
The rate of reaction, R, for each concentration of catechol oxidase used was then calculated
using the formula:
1
R=
time to reach standard brown colour in minutes
(i) Calculate the rate of reaction when the standard brown colour was reached in
2 minutes 30 seconds.
rate of reaction = ............................................... min–1 [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

9
(ii) Fig. 3.3 is a graph showing the results of the investigation.
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
rate of
reaction 0.4
/ min–1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0 2 4 6 8 10
percentage concentration of catechol oxidase
Fig. 3.3
State how the results shown in Fig. 3.3 show that substrate was in excess at all
concentrations of catechol oxidase tested.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

10
(c) The student carried out a further experiment to investigate how the concentration of catechol
affects the initial rate of reaction. All other variables were kept constant throughout this
investigation.
Fig. 3.4 is a graph showing the effect of varying the concentration of catechol on the initial
rate of reaction.
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
initial rate
of reaction 5.0
/ min–1
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20
catechol concentration / mol dm–3
Fig. 3.4
(i) Explain the shape of the curve shown in Fig. 3.4.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

11
(ii) Use Fig. 3.4 to calculate the value of the Michaelis–Menten constant (Km) for the reaction
between catechol oxidase and catechol.
Km = ........................................... mol dm–3 [1]
(iii) Methylcatechol has a similar shape to catechol. Catechol oxidase can also use
methylcatechol as a substrate.
The Km value for the reaction using methylcatechol as the substrate was found to be
much lower than the Km value for the reaction using catechol as the substrate, when the
reactions were carried out under the same conditions.
State what these Km values indicate about the relationship between the enzyme and the
two substrates.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

12
4 Tuberculosis (TB) is a major cause of ill health worldwide.
(a) State the name of a bacterium that causes TB in humans.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of bacteria that cause TB.
X
Y
magnification ×21 000
Fig. 4.1
Calculate the actual length of the bacterial cell shown in Fig. 4.1, along the line X–Y.
Write the formula you will use in the box.
Give your answer in micrometres (μm) to two significant figures.
formula
actual length = ......................................................... μm

[2]
(c) Bacteria are unicellular prokaryotic cells with a diameter of 1–5 μm.
State two other structural features that would identify a cell as prokaryotic.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

13
(d) The World Health Organization (WHO) Global Tuberculosis Report for 2019 published data
on the estimated number of deaths from TB and HIV / AIDS in 2018. All deaths of people from
TB who were infected with HIV were also counted as deaths of people with HIV / AIDS.
Fig. 4.2 shows these data. The dark grey boxes show the estimated number of deaths of
people from TB who were also counted as deaths of people with HIV / AIDS.
deaths of people with

not infected with HIV
from TB HIV / AIDS
deaths of people from TB

with HIV / AIDS
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50

millions of deaths in 2018
Fig. 4.2
A student used the data in Fig. 4.2 to predict that measures to control the spread of HIV will
decrease the number of deaths from TB.
Discuss whether the data in Fig. 4.2 support this prediction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

14
(e) In healthy people, the number of T-helper cells ranges from 500 to 1200 cells per cm3 of
blood. In untreated people infected with HIV, the number of T-helper cells can decrease to
below 200 cells per cm3 of blood.
Explain how a low number of T-helper cells makes it more likely that untreated people infected
with HIV will die if they are also infected with TB.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

15
5 Control of heartbeat is myogenic. This means the electrical activity controlling the rhythm of a
regular heartbeat begins in the heart muscle itself.
Atrial fibrillation (AF) is an abnormal heart rhythm that causes rapid and irregular contractions of
the atria. Untreated cases of AF can lead to a stroke.
(a) A stroke is caused when a small blood clot, often forming in the left atrium, is carried by the
blood to the brain where it blocks a small artery and leads to brain damage.
(i) List all of the structures through which a blood clot in the left atrium must travel to reach
the blood vessels supplying the brain.
The structures must be listed in the correct sequence.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why blocking a small artery in the brain leads to brain damage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A common cause of AF is when a small group of muscle cells in the wall of the left atrium
starts to send out electrical impulses to the surrounding heart muscle cells.
Explain how the control of heartbeat by the sinoatrial node can be disrupted by AF, resulting
in rapid and irregular atrial contractions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

16
(c) Red blood cells are involved in the transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the blood.
Fig. 5.1 is a diagram representing the exchange of oxygen and carbon dioxide between a red
blood cell in a capillary and a respiring cell. Some of the reactions that take place in the red
blood cell are also shown. The diagram is not drawn to scale.
capillary wall
basement
endothelial cells
membrane
respiring cell
red blood cell
CO2 enzyme X
CO2 + H2O H2CO3
carbonic acid Z
4O2
HCO3– + H+
hydrogencarbonate
ion
4O2 + Y HbO8 + H+
Z
oxyhaemoglobin
Fig. 5.1
(i) Identify enzyme X and molecule Y in Fig. 5.1.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The hydrogencarbonate ions shown in Fig. 5.1 leave the red blood cell and are replaced
by chloride ions.
State why it is necessary for chloride ions to enter the red blood cell as hydrogencarbonate
ions leave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

17
(d) Identify the aqueous environment, labelled Z in Fig. 5.1, that surrounds the respiring cell.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Oxygen and carbon dioxide are also exchanged between blood capillaries and alveoli in the
lungs.
The gas exchange system has specialised cells to prevent harmful microscopic particles that
are present in inhaled air from reaching the alveoli.
These particles are associated with many respiratory diseases.
Explain how specialised cells in the gas exchange system prevent harmful microscopic
particles from reaching the alveoli.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]

18
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram showing the structure of part of a DNA molecule.
adenine E
key
one hydrogen bond
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Identify structure E and structure F in Fig. 6.1.
E ........................................................................................................................................
F ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1 draw a circle around one nucleotide. [1]
(iii) State the name of the covalent bond that links two nucleotides together.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

19
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the RNA base sequence of a short length of primary transcript.
Complete Fig. 6.2 by writing the DNA base sequence of the template strand used to form the
primary transcript.
DNA base sequence used to

form the primary transcript
primary transcript GGU GCU AA U CUA
Fig. 6.2
[1]
(c) In eukaryotic cells, the primary transcript is modified to form mRNA.
Explain how the primary transcript is modified to form mRNA.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) The mRNA strand is translated at the ribosome to form a polypeptide.
Describe how the process of translation results in the formation of a polypeptide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22
20
BLANK PAGE
The boundaries and names shown, the designations used and the presentation of material on any maps contained in this question paper/insert do not imply
official endorsement or acceptance by Cambridge Assessment International Education concerning the legal status of any country, territory, or area or any of its
authorities, or of the delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/F/M/22

* 4 2 3 9 2 4 8 6 3 8 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CB) 302733/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 are photomicrographs showing the distribution of tissues in the lungs.
Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through part of the lungs.
Fig. 1.2 is a high-power view of the area indicated on Fig. 1.1.
B section
enlarged in
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

3
(a) State the names of the tissues A, B and D.
A ................................................................................................................................................
B ................................................................................................................................................
D ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Describe the role of the glands labelled C in Fig. 1.1 in maintaining the health of the gas
exchange system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

4
(c) Hyperventilation occurs when a person breathes too fast or too deeply.
The effects of hyperventilation are:
• a decrease in the partial pressure of carbon dioxide in alveolar air

• an increase in the pH of the blood.
Fig. 1.3 shows the change in the oxygen dissociation curve as a result of hyperventilation.
100
90
80
70
60
percentage
saturation of
50
haemoglobin
with oxygen
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
partial pressure of Key
oxygen (pO2) / kPa
pH 7.4
pH 7.7
Fig. 1.3
(i) State the percentage saturation of haemoglobin at a pO2 of 4.0 kPa.
pH = 7.7 ........... kPa
pH = 7.4 ........... kPa [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

5
(ii) Use the information in Fig. 1.3 to state and explain the effect of hyperventilation on the
supply of oxygen to the respiring tissues.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
2 B-lymphocytes are activated to form plasma cells during immune responses.
Fig. 2.1 is a drawing of a plasma cell made from a transmission electron micrograph.
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State the name of the process that is occurring at T.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete Table 2.1 to show the names and functions of the cell structures labelled P, Q,
R and S in the plasma cell shown in Fig. 2.1.
Table 2.1
cell structure
name of cell structure function of cell structure in plasma cell
in Fig. 2.1
[4]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

7
(b) Plasma cells can be used in the commercial production of some monoclonal antibodies.
The method of production is known as the hybridoma method.
Outline the steps in the production of monoclonal antibodies by the hybridoma method.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Antibodies can be collected from human blood donors and used to treat people that may
have been infected with a pathogen. This prevents them becoming ill with the disease.
Explain why this treatment does not prevent people becoming ill if they are infected again
with the same pathogen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 12]

8
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

9
3 A tyrosine kinase receptor (TKR) is a protein complex found in the cell surface membrane of
mammalian cells.
TKR has two components involved in the process of cell signalling:
• a receptor for the signalling molecule (ligand)
• an enzyme that catalyses the transfer of a phosphate group from ATP to an intracellular
protein.
Fig. 3.1 is a diagram to show how TKR is involved in cell signalling.
outside cell
signalling molecule
receptor component
ADP
enzyme component
ATP
activated
intracellular protein
Fig. 3.1
(a) Most enzymes are specific to one reaction.
With reference to Fig. 3.1, explain how the structure of an enzyme provides its specificity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

10
The drug GNF-5 is used in the treatment of some cancers. GNF-5 affects the activity of TKR by
binding to the enzyme component of the complex.
Researchers investigated the effect of GNF-5 on the activity of TKR using different concentrations
of ATP solution. In an experiment the activity of TKR was measured with no GNF-5 and with
GNF-5.
10
9
Key
8
with no GNF-5
7 with GNF-5
activity 6
of TKR
5
/ arbitrary
units 4
0
0 0.1 1 10 100 1000
concentration of ATP / μmol dm–3
Fig. 3.2
(b) The researchers concluded that GNF-5 acts as an inhibitor of the enzyme component of TKR
and that it is a competitive inhibitor.
Use Fig. 3.2 to provide evidence for these conclusions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

11
(c) A mutation of the gene coding for TKR results in changes to the enzyme component of TKR.
This altered form of TKR is known as T315L.
The effect of GNF-5 on the activity of T315L was also investigated.
The results of this investigation are shown in Fig. 3.3.
10
8 Key
7 with no GNF-5
with GNF-5
activity 6
of T315L
5
/ arbitrary
units 4
0
0 0.1 1 10 100 1000
concentration of ATP / μmol dm–3
Fig. 3.3
Use Fig. 3.2 and Fig. 3.3 to:
(i) State how the activity of T315L differs from TKR when no GNF-5 was present.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how the effect of GNF-5 on T315L differs from the effect of GNF-5 on TKR.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

12
4 Adipocytes are cells found in adipose tissue in mammals. These cells absorb glycerol and fatty
acids to make triglycerides for long-term storage.
Fig. 4.1a shows a glycerol molecule and three fatty acids. Fig. 4.1b shows the triglyceride molecule
formed from these components.
CH2 CH CH2 CH2 CH CH2
OH OH OH O O O
+
OH OH OH O C O C O C
O C O C O C CH2 CH2 CH2
CH2 CH2 CH2
X Y Z
Fig. 4.1a Fig. 4.1b
(a) (i) State the name of the bonds that form between glycerol and fatty acids.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When a bond forms between glycerol and a fatty acid, water is a product of the reaction.
State the name given to this type of reaction.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the differences between the fatty acids, X, Y and Z, shown in Fig. 4.1a.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

13
(b) (i) State reasons why triglycerides are described as hydrophobic.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why triglycerides are not suitable as a component of cell surface membranes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

14
5 (a) Infectious diseases are caused by pathogens and are described as transmissible diseases.
Explain what is meant by the term transmissible.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Vibrio cholerae is the bacterium that causes cholera.
Fig. 5.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of V. cholerae.
flagellum
Fig. 5.1
A student wanted to know the actual length of the flagellum shown in Fig. 5.1.
State the information that is needed so that the student can calculate the actual length of the
flagellum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

15
(c) Table 5.1 shows data on large outbreaks of cholera that occurred in seven countries in 2019.
The case-fatality rate is the number of deaths as a percentage of the number of cases.
Table 5.1
number of cases of number of deaths case-fatality rate

country
cholera from cholera /%
Cameroon 1 307 55 4.2
DR Congo 29 087 501 1.7
Haiti 684 3 0.4
Kenya 5 150 39 0.8
Somalia 9 968 50 0.5
Sudan 346 11 3.2
Yemen 2 260 495 3767
(i) Complete Table 5.1 by calculating the case-fatality rate for Yemen. [1]
(ii) Suggest why large outbreaks of cholera occurred in the countries listed in Table 5.1, but
there were very few cases in most other countries.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]

16
6 Cotransporter proteins are membrane proteins found in companion cells of phloem tissue.
Messenger RNA (mRNA) is the molecule in cells that carries genetic information in the DNA that
codes for cotransporter proteins to the sites of protein synthesis in the cytoplasm.
(a) Complete Table 6.1 to compare the structure of a molecule of mRNA with the structure of a
molecule of DNA.
Table 6.1
feature mRNA DNA
names of four bases
name of pentose sugar present
number of strands
[3]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows the events that occur in the nucleus of a companion cell in phloem tissue to
synthesise molecules of mRNA.
DNA
stage 1
stage 2
mRNA
Fig. 6.1
(i) Name stage 1 shown in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what happens at stage 2, shown in Fig. 6.1, to shorten the length of the RNA
molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

17
(c) Cotransporter molecules are proteins produced in companion cells.
Fig. 6.2 shows what happens in the cytoplasm of a companion cell to a transfer RNA molecule
before the cotransporter proteins can be produced.
H O
H3N+ C C
H O H O–
+
H3 N C C
H O–
C CG C CG
Fig. 6.2
(i) Describe the role of the transfer RNA shown in Fig. 6.2 in the synthesis of a cotransporter
protein.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

18
(ii) Outline the role of cotransporter proteins in companion cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/M/J/22

* 2 6 8 2 7 9 7 5 8 1 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/SG) 302736/1
2
1 Epithelial cells in the small intestine have cell structures known as microvilli. The microvilli of these
cells are found only on the surface that borders the gut lumen.
Fig. 1.1 shows images of microvilli of intestinal epithelial cells. These images have been obtained
using a scanning electron microscope and a transmission electron microscope.
Fig. 1.1A is at a different magnification to Fig. 1.1B.
A B
Fig. 1.1
(a) With reference to Fig. 1.1, state how it is possible to distinguish between a scanning electron
micrograph and a transmission electron micrograph.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The approximate length of a microvillus is 1 μm.
Outline the method you would use to estimate the magnifications of the images shown in
Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

3
(c) One role of an intestinal epithelial cell is the absorption of glucose from the gut lumen into the
circulatory system. This involves different membrane transport proteins.
The events occurring in an intestinal epithelial cell during the absorption of glucose are
summarised in Fig. 1.2.
not to scale
glucose
gut
lumen
tissue capillary
K+ fluid
glucose
Na+
Na+
Fig. 1.2
• Sodium ions (Na+) are removed from the cell by active transport through a transport
protein known as a sodium-potassium (Na+ / K+) pump.
• This decreases the concentration of Na+ in the cell compared to the gut lumen.
• Glucose molecules are cotransported with Na+ into the cell from the gut lumen.
• Glucose molecules are transported out of the cell into the tissue fluid down a concentration
gradient.
(i) Active transport involves water-soluble substances, such as Na+ and K+, and the use of
ATP to provide the energy needed for their transport through carrier proteins.
Outline other features of active transport.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
4
(ii) Glucose molecules enter the cell through a membrane protein.
Suggest why glucose molecules need to be cotransported with Na+ when it enters the
cell through the membrane protein.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain how microvilli increase the uptake of glucose into an intestinal epithelial cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Stem cells are also located in the wall of the small intestine. These cells divide by mitosis
continuously.
Suggest and explain the importance of mitosis by stem cells in the small intestine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

5
2 Cholera is a life-threatening and infectious disease caused by the bacterium Vibrio cholerae. One
of the symptoms of the disease is severe diarrhoea.
V. cholerae O1 and V. cholerae O139 are the two forms of the pathogen that are associated
with cholera epidemics (large outbreaks). These two forms have different antigens that can be
detected.
(a) If an outbreak of cholera is suspected but not confirmed, a standard home treatment for
diarrhoeal diseases can be used immediately to help prevent severe illness as a result of
dehydration. If cholera is the cause of the disease, this standard treatment also helps to
prevent a larger outbreak of the disease.
(i) Outline the standard treatment that can be used for suspected cholera cases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest and explain why this treatment can help to prevent a larger outbreak of cholera.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
(b) Rapid diagnostic testing (RDT) can be used to diagnose cholera by detecting the presence of
V. cholerae. One type of RDT involves using a dipstick that contains mobile and immobilised
monoclonal antibodies.
Monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) are specific in their action.
Fig. 2.1 shows a simplified diagram of an RDT dipstick that can be used to distinguish between
V. cholerae O1 and V. cholerae O139. A faecal sample from a person with suspected cholera
is collected and added to a reagent solution to form the test mixture.
area where dipstick can be held
4 control area
3 test area containing immobilised monoclonal antibody that

binds antigen-antibody complex O1
2 test area containing immobilised monoclonal antibody that

binds antigen-antibody complex O139
direction
of flow of 1 area containing two different mobile monoclonal antibodies:
test • anti-O1 antibody
mixture • anti-O139 antibody
area where dipstick is inserted into the test mixture
Fig. 2.1
The test mixture moves up the dipstick through area 1. The mobile monoclonal antibodies are
attached to tiny gold particles. If these antibodies collect in test area 2 or 3, a coloured band
becomes visible.
A coloured band that becomes visible in area 4 confirms that the test strip is working and that
the results are valid.
(i) Explain how the structure of the monoclonal antibodies in the dipstick allows them to be
specific in their action.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

7
(ii) Fig. 2.2 shows the results for samples taken from two different people, A and B, who are
suspected of having cholera.
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
person A person B
Fig. 2.2
With reference to Fig. 2.2, state and explain the conclusions that can be drawn from the
results of the RDT dipsticks for each person.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

8
(c) Table 2.1 shows the results of an investigation to evaluate the effectiveness of an RDT
dipstick in diagnosing cholera.
Samples taken from 156 people were tested using a dipstick and compared to the results
obtained by culturing the pathogen in a laboratory for accurate identification.
Table 2.1
number of test results

using culture techniques using dipstick
(to obtain accurate
identification) correct diagnosis incorrect diagnosis
positive results for cholera 102 97 5
negative results for cholera 54 32 22
(i) With reference to Table 2.1, calculate the percentage chance of an RDT dipstick correctly
confirming that a person with cholera has the disease.
[1]
(ii) Using an RDT dipstick to diagnose cholera is much cheaper than culturing the pathogen
and requires less technical skill.
Suggest one additional advantage of using an RDT dipstick, rather than culture
techniques, to diagnose cholera.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

9
3 Hummingbirds are the smallest of birds and are found in the Americas. Some species migrate
hundreds of kilometres between warmer overwintering areas and summer breeding grounds. Like
mammals, birds maintain a constant body temperature.
Hummingbirds have a high requirement for sugars because they have a very high metabolic rate.
Fig. 3.1 shows a hummingbird feeding on nectar, one of their main food sources.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Nectar is a sugary liquid containing mainly sucrose, fructose and glucose.
Sucrose has the molecular formula C12H22O11. Fructose and glucose each have the molecular
formula C6H12O6.
State two differences between sucrose and fructose, other than the number of carbon,
hydrogen and oxygen atoms present.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

10
(b) In preparation for migration, sugars need to be converted to triglycerides to function as energy
reserves. Hummingbirds can double their body mass during this time.
(i) Fig. 3.2 shows the structural formula of one type of storage triglyceride. The triglyceride
has two types of fatty acid residue, palmitate and oleate.
H H H
H C C C H
O O O
C O C O C O
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H C
H C H H C H C
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H C H H C H H C H
H H C H H C H
H C H H C H
H H
palmitate oleate
Fig. 3.2
Outline the features of the molecular structure of the triglyceride shown in Fig. 3.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22
11
(ii) In hummingbirds, glycogen is the long-term carbohydrate energy store.
Suggest one reason why hummingbirds build up a greater energy store in the form of
triglyceride, rather than a greater energy store of glycogen, in preparation for migration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) In birds such as hummingbirds:

• blood is kept within vessels
• for each complete circuit of the body, blood passes through the heart twice.
State the term used to describe this type of circulatory system.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The heart of birds has the same structure as the heart of mammals. Compared with the heart
of mammals, the heart of birds is larger in proportion to their body size.
Suggest why the heart of birds is larger in proportion to their body size.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Complete Table 3.1 to show the names and functions of the main blood vessels associated
with the heart of mammals.
Table 3.1
function of blood vessel name of blood vessel

carries blood from the heart to the lungs
carries blood to the heart from the lungs
carries blood from the heart to the rest of the body
carries blood to the heart from the rest of the body
[3]
[Total: 12]

12
4 The enzyme carbonic anhydrase has been found in a wide range of organisms and acts as a
catalyst in many tissues.
Studies have shown that there are differences in the protein structure of the enzyme and differences
in the number and organisation of introns and exons of the gene coding for the enzyme.
All carbonic anhydrase enzymes catalyse the same reversible reaction, shown in Fig. 4.1.
carbonic anhydrase
CO2 + H 2O H2CO3 H+ + HCO3–
carbon water X hydrogen Y
dioxide ions
Fig. 4.1
(a) With reference to Fig. 4.1, name X and Y.
X ...............................................................................................................................................
Y ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Carbonic anhydrase enzymes can have different primary structures.
Suggest how all carbonic anhydrase enzymes can catalyse the same reaction, even though
they have different primary structures.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Genes coding for proteins in eukaryotes consist of introns and exons.
Outline the similarities and differences between the introns and the exons of genes coding for
proteins such as carbonic anhydrase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

13
All mammals have the same type of carbonic anhydrase, known as α-carbonic anhydrase. Many
different forms, or isoforms, of α-carbonic anhydrase have been identified in mammals.
There are 15 isoforms of α-carbonic anhydrase (CA) in humans. Cells of different tissues have
one or more isoforms. Within cells the isoforms may be in different locations.
(d) Red blood cells contain two isoforms, CA1 and CA2.
Suggest the location of CA1 and CA2 in red blood cells and give a reason for your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Isoform CA6 forms part of human breast milk. Mammary gland cells package CA6 in Golgi
vesicles for release from the cells.
Name the transport mechanism associated with CA6 secretion.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Human CA isoforms in some epithelial cells in the eye have a role in the formation of the clear
fluid of the eye known as aqueous humour. Overactivity of the enzyme may lead to a harmful
increase of pressure within the eye and cause a condition known as glaucoma.
Acetazolamide is a therapeutic drug that can be used in the treatment of glaucoma. It acts as
a reversible non-competitive inhibitor.
Describe the mechanism of action of acetazolamide as a reversible non-competitive inhibitor

of carbonic anhydrase.
..................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]

14
5 Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of a transverse section through part of the bronchus of the human
gas exchange system. The image is of a good resolution for a light microscope.
The bronchial epithelium is a single layer of cells lining the lumen of the bronchus.
lumen
D
luminal L
surface
bronchial
epithelium
A
elastic
fibres
B
magnification ×180
Fig. 5.1
(a) The luminal surface shown in Fig. 5.1 is not clearly defined and appears slightly blurred.
State why the luminal surface of the bronchial epithelium appears slightly blurred, even
though the resolution of the image is good.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some cells of the bronchial epithelium shown in Fig. 5.1 appear darker than others. For
example, cell D appears darker than cell L.
With reference to the bronchial epithelium shown in Fig. 5.1, explain why some cells, such as
cell D, appear darker and other cells, such as cell L, appear lighter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

15
(c) In Fig. 5.1 the tissue in box B is cartilage.
The tissue shown in box A is different from the tissue in box B.
Outline the differences in the structure and function of tissue A compared with tissue B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

16
6 The transport tissues of plants are phloem and xylem.
The role of xylem is the transport of water and mineral ions from the soil solution to the different
parts of the plant body.
The role of phloem is the translocation of assimilates and other substances from sources to sinks.
(a) The source of mineral ions for the plant is the soil solution. These mineral ions are transported
from the roots in the xylem. Mineral ions are also found in the phloem sap within phloem
sieve tubes.
Suggest why mineral ions are found within phloem sieve tubes and state how they are
transported within phloem sieve tubes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Phloem tissue consists of different cell types.
Complete the passage using the most appropriate terms to summarise some of the features
of phloem tissue.
The end walls of sieve tube elements are modified to allow efficient flow of phloem sap
by the formation of ....................................................................... . These structures also
prevent the cells from bursting under pressure. The cytoplasm of sieve tube elements is
very much reduced and is found at the ....................................................................... of the
cells. Most of the organelles in the cell are absent. Adjacent to sieve tube elements are
....................................................................... cells that carry out the metabolic processes of
the missing organelles, allowing the sieve tube elements to function. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/M/J/22

* 2 7 8 5 5 3 1 5 6 2 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/CT) 302731/2
2
1 The trachea of the gas exchange system branches into two airways, each of which enters a lung.
(a) Name the airways that branch from the trachea to enter the lungs.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The lower part of the trachea receives blood from arteries that branch from the aorta. Different
arteries carry blood from the heart to the alveoli of the lungs.
State the differences between the arteries supplying the lower part of the trachea and the
arteries that supply blood to the alveoli of the lungs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through part of the trachea.
mucous gland
magnification ×360
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

3
(i) In Fig. 1.1, one of the tissues in the trachea is labelled T.
Describe the structural features of tissue T visible in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Identify structure X in Fig. 1.1 and outline the features that helped your identification.
structure X = ..........................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Bacterial cells are prokaryotic. The cells of plants are described as eukaryotic.
(a) Complete the passage comparing a bacterial cell with a plant cell.
A bacterial cell and a plant cell have a cell wall, but the main component of the bacterial
cell wall is ............................................................... and not cellulose. The same organelle
is used for protein synthesis in both cell types, but a bacterial cell only has smaller,
70S, ............................................................... . A bacterial cell does not have a large
............................................................... surrounded by a tonoplast.

[3]
(b) Protoplasts are plant cells that have had their cell walls removed by treatment with enzymes.
Scientists often use protoplasts when researching ways to improve the yield of crop plants.
Fig. 2.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of protoplasts of cells from the tobacco plant,
Nicotiana tabacum.
external solution at
same water potential as
protoplasts
magnification ×256
Fig. 2.1
Explain why scientists keep the protoplasts in a solution that has the same water potential as
the cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

5
After protoplast treatment, the cells can be stimulated to synthesise new cell wall material.
Fig. 2.2 is at a higher magnification than Fig. 2.1 and shows a scanning electron micrograph of
part of a protoplast in an early stage of cell wall synthesis.
chloroplasts
visible cellulose
below the microfibrils
cell surface
membrane
Fig. 2.2
(c) The cellulose microfibrils visible in Fig. 2.2 will form cellulose fibres. Each microfibril is formed
from cellulose molecules. Each cellulose molecule is a polymer of β-glucose.
(i) Describe the structure of a cellulose molecule and a cellulose microfibril.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name one substance that may be added to the network formed by the cellulose
microfibrils in the formation of a cell wall.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Name the type of plant cell that could have been used to produce the protoplast shown in
Fig. 2.2.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]

6
3 Hakea spp. are xerophytic plants native to Australia. The leaves of Hakea have adaptations for a
xerophytic mode of life.
(a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of a transverse section of part of a leaf of H. laurina.
waxy
cuticle
stoma
sub-stomatal
air space
Fig. 3.1
Describe the xerophytic features of the waxy cuticle and the stoma shown in Fig. 3.1 and
explain how these features adapt the plant to a xerophytic mode of life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) When the availability of phosphate ions and other soil nutrients is limited, a number of
changes occur in the roots of Hakea spp.:
• Regions of meristematic tissue are active for a few days.

• Root clusters are formed. A root cluster is a dense arrangement of tiny side roots known
as rootlets.
• Most of the epidermal cells of the rootlets are root hair cells.
• Rootlets release compounds into the soil that make phosphates and other mineral ions
more soluble for uptake.
• Uptake of phosphate ions and the absorption of water from the soil increases.
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

7
(i) Meristem cells have a similar role to stem cells in animals.
Suggest how meristematic tissue activity leads to the formation of root clusters.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Organic anions (negatively charged organic compounds) are released into the soil by
rootlets. The concentration of these organic anions can become higher in the soil solution
than in the rootlet cells.
Suggest and explain how the concentration of organic anions in the soil solution can
become higher than in the rootlet cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain how the formation of root clusters can lead to an increase in the uptake of
phosphate ions and absorption of water from the soil solution.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

8
4 There are many different forms of Vibrio cholerae, a bacterium that is found naturally in aquatic
environments. The bacterium is motile (can move) and uses a cell structure known as a flagellum
to allow it to move through water.
Fig. 4.1 is a drawing of four cells of one form of V. cholerae.
flagellum
X Y
cell wall
Fig. 4.1
Two main forms of V. cholerae, O1 and O139, are able to colonise the small intestine and cause
cholera. These two forms are able to produce a toxin, choleragen, which causes the symptoms of
diarrhoeal disease. Mutant V. cholerae that lack flagella are less able to cause disease.
(a) The magnification of the diagram shown in Fig. 4.1 is ×32 000.
Calculate the actual width X–Y in Fig. 4.1 in nanometres (nm) and give your answer to the
nearest 10 nm.
Complete Fig. 4.2 to show the formula you will use to make your calculation.
actual
=
width
Fig. 4.2
answer = ................................................... nm [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

9
(b) State the term used to describe disease-causing organisms, such as the bacterium
V. cholerae.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Outline one way in which an uninfected person may become infected by V. cholerae.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Choleragen is produced after V. cholerae has penetrated (passed through) the mucus lining
and attached to intestinal epithelial cells.
Choleragen is composed of two subunits:

• subunit A consists of one polypeptide
• subunit B consists of five identical polypeptides
• the polypeptide in subunit A is different from the polypeptides in subunit B.
Two genes, ctxA and ctxB, are needed to produce choleragen. Only one strand of the DNA
forming gene ctxA is involved in the production of subunit A. Only one strand of the DNA
forming gene ctxB is involved in the production of subunit B.
Explain why only one strand of the DNA of each gene is involved in the production of the
subunits.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

10
Monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) can be designed to act against components of the cell wall of V.
cholerae. The cell wall has an outer membrane with lipopolysaccharide (LPS) molecules, shown
in Fig. 4.3.
O-polysaccharide
outer lipopolysaccharide
membrane (LPS)
core polysaccharide
cell wall
lipid A
fluid space
peptidoglycan
layer
Fig. 4.3
The core polysaccharide and the lipid A components of the LPS molecules are the same in
V. cholerae O1 and V. cholerae O139. However they have different O-polysaccharides.
There are also different types of V. cholerae O1 and these have different O-polysaccharides.
(e) Laboratory tests were carried out using two different monoclonal antibodies that had been
designed and produced to act against the LPS of bacterial cultures of V. cholerae O1:
• mAb 2D6 acts against the O-polysaccharide

• mAb ZAC-3 acts against the core polysaccharide and lipid A components.
(i) Explain why the mAb ZAC-3 produced against the core polysaccharide and lipid A
components will not act against the O-polysaccharide of the LPS molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

11
(ii) The results of the tests showed that both mAbs were effective in causing agglutination
(clumping) of bacteria and in preventing their motility. This suggests they may be useful
for preventing cholera and for treating the disease.
Discuss whether mAb 2D6 and mAb ZAC-3 may be useful for preventing cholera and for
treating the disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 13]

12
5 Arachidonic acid is a fatty acid that is a common component of phospholipids.
Phospholipids can be used as a source of arachidonic acid when it is metabolised within cells in
an enzyme-catalysed pathway known as the cyclooxygenase (COX) pathway.
The final products of the COX pathway can be different in different cell types, causing a range
of responses. In some cells, the products are involved in the inflammatory response, which is a
response by the body to infection. In other cells, cell division is stimulated.
Fig. 5.1 shows the first reaction in the COX pathway. This reaction is catalysed by an enzyme
known as COX-2.
COX-2
arachidonic acid + oxygen prostaglandin-H2
Fig. 5.1
(a) The enzymes involved in the COX pathway are located in the membrane of rough endoplasmic
reticulum.
Suggest the advantages to the cell of enzyme pathways being located in cell membranes,
rather than in the cytosol of the cell (fluid portion of cytoplasm).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) During an inflammatory response, compounds produced by the COX pathway cause an
increased sensitivity to pain.
Some anti-inflammatory drugs are reversible competitive inhibitors of COX-2.
Fig. 5.2 shows how increasing arachidonic acid concentration affects COX-2 activity.
Vmax
rate of reaction
/ arbitrary units
½ Vmax
Km
arachidonic acid concentration
/ arbitrary units
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

13
(i) Sketch on Fig. 5.2 the curve obtained if an anti-inflammatory drug, which is a competitive
inhibitor, is present with arachidonic acid. [1]
(ii) Complete the statements to show whether the maximum rate of reaction (Vmax) and the
Michaelis-Menten constant (Km) of COX-2 increases, decreases, or stays the same in
the presence of a competitive inhibitor.
In the presence of a competitive inhibitor:
Vmax of COX-2 ...............................................................
Km of COX-2 ............................................................... . [2]
(c) COX-2 is composed of two identical polypeptides. The enzyme is produced when a gene,
PTGS2, located on chromosome 1, is switched on and transcription begins.
(i) Using gene PTGS2 and enzyme COX-2 as examples, explain what is meant by a gene.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Some mutations in PTGS2 lead to an increased rate of transcription. These mutations
have been linked to an increased risk of certain types of cancer.
Suggest why mutations in PTGS2 may increase the risk of cancer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
(d) Fig. 5.3 shows the molecular structure of arachidonic acid. Not all hydrogen atoms are shown.
H H
H C C H
H C C C
H C C C C H
C C C
H
C
C H
O C C C
H C C C H
O H
Fig. 5.3
With reference to Fig. 5.3, explain why increasing the proportion of phospholipids with
arachidonic acid in a cell will increase the fluidity of the cell surface membrane of the cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

15
6 The sinoatrial node, atrioventricular node and the Purkyne tissue have important roles in the
cardiac cycle.
(a) State the precise location in the heart of the sinoatrial node.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the part of the cardiac cycle that is directly initiated by the wave of excitation sent out by
the sinoatrial node.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Part of the control of the cardiac cycle involves the contraction of the ventricle walls after the
walls of the atria have finished contracting.
Outline how this control is achieved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Name the valves of the heart that open soon after the Purkyne tissue has received an impulse
from the atrioventricular node.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/M/J/22

* 0 9 5 7 7 0 4 2 1 3 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/FC) 301693/4
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph showing a section of a human liver cell.
Fig. 1.1
(i) Name organelles A and B shown in Fig. 1.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) In liver cells, enzymes are attached to the membrane of smooth endoplasmic reticulum.
With reference to the functions of smooth endoplasmic reticulum, suggest the advantages
of having enzymes attached to the membrane rather than free in the lumen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

3
(b) Explain the advantages of using a transmission electron microscope compared with a light
microscope when viewing a liver cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is a simplified diagram of the human circulatory system.
head and arms
lungs
R
Q
liver
stomach and
intestines
kidneys
lower body
and legs
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State why the human circulatory system is described as a closed, double circulation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Identify blood vessel Q and blood vessel R, shown in Fig. 2.1.
Q .......................................................................................................................................
R ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

5
(iii) Blood leaving the heart passes through valves before it enters blood vessel R.
Describe the differences between the structure of blood vessel Q and the structure of
blood vessel R. Do not refer to valves in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Blood plasma plays an important role in the transport of molecules such as antibodies.
Scientists discovered that some of the antibodies in the blood plasma of sharks have a
different structure to the antibodies found in human blood plasma.
Fig. 2.2 shows the structure of an antibody molecule found in the blood plasma of a shark.
Fig. 2.2
(i) State how the quaternary structure of a human antibody molecule differs from the
quaternary structure of the shark antibody molecule shown in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
(ii) Human antibodies are used in the treatment of some forms of cancer. However, the
antibodies injected into the bloodstream can only reach a small percentage of the cancer
cells that form the cancerous tumour.
Shark antibodies are smaller than human antibodies. Scientists are researching the
possibility of injecting shark antibodies into the bloodstream to treat cancerous tumours
in humans.
Suggest how using the smaller shark antibodies may be more effective in reaching a
greater percentage of cancer cells than human antibodies and lead to greater success at
treating cancer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Antibodies can also be used in the prevention of infectious diseases.
Explain how injection of antibodies into the bloodstream can protect a person from
disease after infection by a pathogen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

7
3 Carbonic anhydrase is a globular protein found in red blood cells.
(a) (i) Explain why this protein is described as globular.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the function of carbonic anhydrase in red blood cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) A protein such as carbonic anhydrase is coded for by a gene. A gene forms part of a
DNA molecule.
Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of a small section of a DNA molecule.
5' O O 3'
P NH2 O
–O O N
O
N HN
O N N
N O
O
O O
P NH2 O O O–
–O O P X
N
O O
N HN
O N N
N O
O H2N
O O
P O O–
–O
O H 2N P
O N
O O
NH N
O N N
N O
NH2 O
O O
P O O O–
H 2N
–O O N P
O O
NH N
O N N
N O
O
O
3' O O–
P
O O
5'
Fig. 3.1
(i) Identify the base X and state the evidence in Fig. 3.1 that supports this identification.
base X ...............................................................................................................................
evidence from Fig. 3.1 .......................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

9
(ii) The section of the DNA molecule in Fig. 3.1 is part of a gene coding for a polypeptide.
Base X, shown in Fig. 3.1, is located in an exon on the strand of DNA that is transcribed
during protein synthesis. A mutation that results in the deletion of base X will affect the
polypeptide produced.
Explain how this deletion may affect the polypeptide produced during protein synthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Gene mutations can occur in either introns or exons.
Suggest the effect of a gene mutation in an intron.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

10
4 (a) Scientists have produced structures known as virosomes, which are used in certain vaccines.
Virosomes do not cause disease.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a section through a virosome used in some vaccinations to protect
against the virus which causes influenza.
glycoprotein
haemagglutinin
central area
phospholipid glycoprotein
bilayer neuraminidase
enzyme
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the differences between the structure of a virosome and a virus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the structure of the virosome shown in Fig. 4.1 suggests that the central
area of the virosome is aqueous.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

11
(b) The glycoproteins haemagglutinin and neuraminidase are found in the influenza virus and in
the virosomes used in a vaccine against the influenza virus.
Haemagglutinin binds to a receptor in the cell surface membrane of phagocytes.
Suggest why haemagglutinin is present in virosomes used in the vaccine for influenza.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Different strains of the influenza virus have formed as a result of mutations. Each strain of the
virus contains the enzyme neuraminidase. Neuraminidase helps the virus to leave host cells
after the virus has replicated. In each strain of the influenza virus, the primary structure of the
active site of the neuraminidase enzyme remains unchanged.
Suggest why the primary structure of the active site of neuraminidase remains unchanged in
each strain of the influenza virus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

12
5 (a) When water molecules enter a plant through the roots, the molecules cross the cortex and
enter the xylem tissue to be transported to other parts of the plant.
There are two pathways that water can take when crossing the root to the xylem tissue.
Complete Table 5.1 with information about the two pathways.
Table 5.1
name of pathway outline of pathway

movement of water from cell to cell through
plasmodesmata
[2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of a transverse section through the stem of a flowering plant.
On Fig. 5.1, draw a label line and the letter T to identify xylem tissue. [1]
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22
13
(c) Scientists have studied the process of cell death that occurs during the development of the
cells that become mature xylem vessel elements.
During this development, the tonoplast ruptures (bursts) and releases hydrolytic enzymes
contained in the vacuole into the cytoplasm.
(i) Name an organelle found in animal cells that has a similar function to the vacuole in the
developing xylem vessel elements.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The rupture of the tonoplast during development of xylem vessel elements is due to
changes in permeability of the tonoplast.
Suggest how the permeability of the tonoplast changes and explain how this change
could result in the rupture of the tonoplast.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) During development of the xylem vessel elements the pH of the cytoplasm decreases.
This change in pH activates enzymes in the cytoplasm that cause organelles to swell.
Suggest how a change in pH of the cytoplasm can activate enzymes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
(d) Some insects are vectors of disease.
(i) When an insect feeds on the xylem fluid it can act as a vector of plant diseases such as
Pierce’s disease. This bacterial disease affects many fruit trees causing the leaves to
turn brown and drop from the plant, resulting in much less fruit being produced.
Explain why Pierce’s disease can be described as an infectious disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Malaria is another infectious disease that also involves an insect vector.
State the type of organism that causes malaria and name one organism that causes
malaria in humans.
type of organism ................................................................................................................
name .................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

15
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a photomicrograph of plant cells in stages of the mitotic cell cycle.
Fig. 6.1
(i) Name the stage of mitosis shown in cell Q.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Outline the roles of mitosis in a healthy plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

16
(b) Uncontrolled mitosis can cause cancer in humans.

Paclitaxel is a drug used in the treatment of some forms of cancer.
Researchers investigated the effect of Paclitaxel on the mitotic cell cycle of cancer cells.
• The cancer cells were grown for two days and then divided into groups.
• Each group was treated with a different concentration of Paclitaxel.
After 28 hours (one cell cycle):
• the percentage of cells in stages of mitosis was calculated

• the ratio of the number of cells in anaphase to the number of cells in metaphase
was determined.
The results of the investigation are shown in Fig. 6.2.
Key
percentage of cells in
stages of mitosis
ratio of the number
of cells in anaphase
to cells in metaphase
50 0.30
40 0.25
30 0.20
ratio of the
percentage of
number of cells
cells in
in anaphase
stages of
to cells in
mitosis 20 0.15
metaphase
10 0.10
0 0.05
0 10 20 30 40 50
concentration of Paclitaxel / nmol dm–3
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

17
With reference to Fig. 6.2, describe the results and suggest an explanation for the effect of
Paclitaxel on the mitotic cell cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/21/O/N/22

* 6 0 4 3 8 5 5 2 5 2 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/SG) 301687/4
2
1 The mammalian circulatory system is adapted for the long-distance transport of the respiratory
gases, oxygen and carbon dioxide.
The system is described as a closed double circulation.
(a) Name:
• the two different circulations of the double circulatory system of mammals
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
• the main vein returning deoxygenated blood to the heart.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) In a closed circulation, blood is kept within vessels at all times.
Name the type of blood vessel that connects capillaries and veins.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of a section through the heart.
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1:
• add a label line and the letter L to show the artery that takes blood from the heart to
the lungs
• add a label line and the letter R to show the valve that closes when the right ventricle is
in systole. [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

3
(d) The entry of carbon dioxide into red blood cells results in the production of hydrogencarbonate
ions. This involves the enzyme carbonic anhydrase.
Complete the passage summarising the production of hydrogencarbonate ions by:
• writing the correct biological term in the spaces provided

• writing the molecular formula for two of the terms in the spaces in brackets.
Carbonic anhydrase has an overall spherical shape and is known as a
............................................... protein. The enzyme acts within the cell so can be described
as an ............................................... enzyme. When blood passes into the capillary network
through actively respiring tissues, carbon dioxide (CO2) diffuses into red blood cells and
carbonic anhydrase catalyses a reaction where ............................................... (.................)
is combined with CO2 to form ............................................... (H2CO3), which rapidly forms
............................................... ions (.................) and hydrogencarbonate ions (HCO3–). [5]
[Total: 11]

4
2 Human cytomegalovirus (HCMV) is a common virus affecting humans. In people with a fully
functioning immune system, infection by HCMV usually causes no, or only mild, symptoms.
Fig. 2.1A is a diagram of a section through HCMV. In Fig. 2.1B, only the outer part of HCMV
is sectioned.
glycoprotein
double-stranded
DNA
S T
tegument
proteins
A B
Fig. 2.1
The viral DNA shown in Fig. 2.1 contains genes that code for proteins important in viral replication
and viral structure, including viral DNA polymerase and proteins known as tegument proteins.
Viruses can only replicate in host cells as they need to use processes and contents of the host
cell. Complete viral particles that are released from the host cell are known as virions.
(a) Structure S in Fig. 2.1A is a subunit of structure T in Fig. 2.1B.
Name the chemical compound used to make structure S and name structure T.
S ...............................................................................................................................................
T ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The actual diameter of the HCMV shown in Fig. 2.1 is 0.17 micrometres (µm).
Calculate the actual diameter of the virus in nanometres (nm).
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest the role of viral DNA polymerase within the host cell.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

5
(d) The virus in Fig. 2.1 is drawn as a spherical shape. Structure T is always the same shape.
However, electron micrographs show that HCMV virions are not all the same shape.
Suggest how HCMV virions can be of different shapes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) With reference to Fig. 2.1A, state one similarity and one difference between the genetic
material of HCMV and the genetic material of a typical bacterial cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f) HCMV is known to infect some types of human cell that carry out the mitotic cell cycle.
Studies have shown that in the presence of one tegument protein, UL69, the cell cycle stops
in the G1 stage.
Outline the effects the presence of UL69 will have on the normal activity of the mitotic
cell cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

6
(g) After a person has been infected with HCMV, the virus remains in a dormant state in the body
for life.
If the virus becomes active again (reactivates), the virus will only cause serious illness if the
person has a weak immune system at that time.
Explain why the response to reactivation of HCMV is more likely to cause serious illness in a
person who has a weak immune system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

7
3 Plasmodium falciparum is one species of Plasmodium that causes the life-threatening disease
malaria. With early diagnosis and the correct drug treatment, the pathogen can be eliminated from
the body, particularly if the disease is not severe.
(a) Name the type of pathogen that causes malaria.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) To help prevent the development and spread of drug resistance in Plasmodium, the World
Health Organization (WHO) recommends using a treatment known as artemisinin-based
combination therapy (ACT).
ACT involves two different types of drug:
• a fast-acting drug derived from a compound known as artemisinin, which causes a rapid
decrease in the number of P. falciparum
• one or more longer-acting, non-artemisinin, drugs that eliminate any remaining
pathogens.
(i) Suggest why using ACT with the two different types of drug is more effective in preventing
the development of drug resistance in Plasmodium than a treatment using only one type
of drug.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In some areas, partial artemisinin resistance has developed. This means ACT takes a
longer time for the pathogen to be eliminated from the body.
Explain why there is an increased risk of transmission of the pathogen to other people if
a person is receiving ACT and the pathogen has partial artemisinin resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(c) ACT can act on the stage of the life cycle of P. falciparum that occurs within red blood cells.
The cells of P. falciparum in this stage are known as trophozoites.
Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of a blood smear (thin layer of cells). Some of the red blood
cells contain trophozoites.
trophozoite
Fig. 3.1
PfK13 is a protein that has an important role in the development of the trophozoite stage of
P. falciparum. The gene kelch13 codes for PfK13.
Two different mutations of kelch13, known as F446I and C580Y, were investigated to see
if they were associated with partial artemisinin resistance. Details of these mutations are
summarised in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
change in DNA change in protein PfK13

name of nucleotide nucleotide
mutation amino acid before amino acid after
present in present after
mutation mutation
kelch13 mutation
F446I thymine (T) adenine (A) phenylalanine (phe) isoleucine (ile)
C580Y guanine (G) adenine (A) cysteine (cys) tyrosine (tyr)
(i) Using gene kelch13 and mutation F446I as examples, explain the difference between a
gene and a gene mutation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

9
(ii) In the investigation, the survival rate of trophozoites within red blood cells was determined
for two different concentrations of an artemisinin-based drug known as DHA.
Two different strains, A and B, of P. falciparum were tested. Three different cultures of
each strain were involved:
• no mutation in kelch13 (control)
• kelch13 F446I mutation
• kelch13 C580Y mutation.
Table 3.2 shows the six different cultures tested and the trophozoite survival rate for
each culture.
Table 3.2
mean percentage survival rate of trophozoite

culture
culture details DHA concentration DHA concentration
number
20 nmol dm–3 700 nmol dm–3
1 strain A no mutation 3.15 0.00
2 strain A, F446I mutation 26.00 0.73
3 strain A, C580Y mutation 33.08 0.91
4 strain B no mutation 2.86 0.00
5 strain B, F446I mutation 13.50 0.53
6 strain B, C580Y mutation 17.50 0.63
State the main conclusions that can be drawn from the results shown in Table 3.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

10
4 The airways of the gas exchange system are lined with epithelium. Gradual changes in the
structural features of this epithelium occur as the airways branch and become increasingly narrow.
(a) Table 4.1 shows the changes that occur in the number of goblet cells in the epithelium of the
different structures of the gas exchange system.
Table 4.1
gas exchange number of goblet cells

structure in epithelium
trachea many
bronchi many
larger bronchioles very few
smaller bronchioles none
alveoli none
Goblet cells produce mucus, which is important in maintaining the health of the airways.
The smallest bronchioles closest to the alveoli are known as respiratory bronchioles.
Suggest and explain why respiratory bronchioles do not have any goblet cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 is a photomicrograph of a section through a bronchiole, which is surrounded

by alveoli.
tissue X
magnification ×40
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22
11
(i) There are structural differences between the epithelium of the bronchiole and the
epithelium of an alveolus.
Describe the differences between the epithelium of bronchioles and the epithelium of
alveoli, other than differences in the number of goblet cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Tissue X, shown in Fig. 4.1, is located in the wall of the bronchiole.
Name tissue X and outline the function of tissue X in the bronchiole.
tissue X = ........................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

12
5 Fibroblasts are one of the cell types of connective tissue. The cells synthesise and secrete collagen,
which forms part of the supporting external cellular environment, known as the extracellular matrix.
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the primary structure of a section of a polypeptide chain of collagen.
gly pro ala gly pro ser gly ala pro gly pro ile
Fig. 5.1
Explain how the primary structure shown in Fig. 5.1 indicates that the structure of the
polypeptide is suited to be a component of a collagen molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) After final processing in the Golgi body, collagen is released to the outer surface of the cell by
exocytosis.
Complete the passage to describe the process of exocytosis.
After final processing in the Golgi body,

...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

13
(c) Hydrolytic enzymes, known as collagenases, are secreted by cells in an inactive form.
Cells also secrete inhibitors of collagenases. The activity of the enzymes and inhibitors is
regulated so that the development and maintenance of the extracellular matrix is controlled.
(i) State and explain what the outcome will be for the composition of the extracellular matrix
if collagenase inhibitor activity is needed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Synthetic inhibitors have been trialled as potential treatment for diseases caused by a
lack of regulation of collagenase activity.
Research involves investigating the mechanism of action of an inhibitor.
State the effect that a non-competitive inhibitor will have on the maximum rate of
reaction, Vmax, and the Michaelis–Menten constant, Km, of collagenase.
Vmax ...................................................................................................................................
Km ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]

14
6 Xylem and phloem are the transport tissues of plants. Both tissues have more than one cell type.
The conducting cells of xylem contain xylem sap and those of phloem contain phloem sap.
The composition of xylem sap differs from the composition of phloem sap.
(a) The main component of xylem sap and phloem sap is water.
Explain why water is the main component of xylem sap and phloem sap.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Three types of cell associated with the translocation of sucrose are:
• companion cell
• mesophyll cell
• phloem sieve tube element.
A, B and C are three events that occur at the source. Each event refers to ‘the cell’ but does
not name the type of cell concerned.
A Sucrose moves through plasmodesmata into the cell.

B Hydrogen ions are transported out of the cell.
C Sucrose moves into the cell through cotransporter proteins.
Complete Table 6.1 by matching the event with a correct cell type.
Each cell type may be identified once, more than once, or not at all.
Table 6.1
event cell type
[3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/22/O/N/22

* 4 3 6 4 9 4 3 7 2 7 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/SG) 306205/2
2
1 (a) During translation, a polypeptide is synthesised when amino acids are added to a growing
chain of amino acids.
Fig. 1.1 shows part of a growing chain of amino acids and the amino acid cysteine.
cysteine
SH
chain of amino acids
CH2
O H O
.......................... C + N C C
OH H H OH
.......................... C
Fig. 1.1
(i) Complete Fig. 1.1 by showing the formation of the bond between cysteine and the
growing chain of amino acids in the process of translation. [3]
(ii) State the name of the covalent bond that forms when cysteine is added to the growing
chain of amino acids.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the organelle where the reaction shown in Fig. 1.1 takes place.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 is a ribbon diagram showing the three-dimensional structure of a protein from the
bacterium Streptococcus.
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

3
(i) Describe the secondary structure of the protein shown in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the protein shown in Fig. 1.2 has tertiary structure, but not
quaternary structure.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) An analysis of the amino acid composition of the protein in Fig. 1.2 showed that it does
not contain any cysteine residues.
Explain how the three-dimensional structure of the protein shown in Fig. 1.2 is held
in place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is a scanning electron micrograph showing a macrophage engulfing some bacteria.
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Describe how macrophages engulf bacteria.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain the functions of lysosomes in cells such as macrophages.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

5
Question 2 continues on page 6.

6
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the reported number of new cases of tuberculosis (TB) in the USA and the
number of new cases per 100 000 of the population of the USA between 1993 and 2018.
Key
number of new cases
30 000 number of new cases 12
25 000 per 100 000 population 10
20 000 8 number of
number of new cases
15 000 6
new cases per 100 000
10 000 4 population
5000 2
0 0
1993 1998 2003 2008 2013 2018
year
Fig. 2.2
(i) Calculate the percentage change in the number of new cases of TB in the USA between
1993 and 2018.
Show all your working.
answer ..................................................... % [3]
(ii) Use Fig. 2.2 to describe the trend in the number of new cases of TB in the USA between
1993 and 2018.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

7
(c) Suggest an advantage of calculating the number of new cases per 100 000 each year in the
prevention and control of TB across the world.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) TB is endemic (always present) in many populations across the world and many countries
have high numbers of cases.
State two reasons why it is difficult to reduce the number of cases of TB across the world.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 14]

8
3 (a) Explain how water moves up xylem vessels in the trunks of trees.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Cavitation is the formation of air-filled spaces inside the columns of water in xylem vessels
in trees. These air-filled spaces form more often when there are high rates of movement of
water in xylem vessels.
When an air-filled space forms in a xylem vessel, a noise is made that can be detected as a
‘click’ by a sensor placed close to the xylem vessels in the trunk of a tree.
Students investigated the relationship between two environmental factors and the rate of
cavitation in a Scots pine tree, Pinus sylvestris, over a 50-hour period. The two factors they
investigated were:
• photosynthetically active radiation (PAR), which is the light energy available to plants
that they absorb and use in photosynthesis
• wind speed.
The cavitation rate was estimated by recording the number of clicks detected by the sensor.
Suggest the conclusions that can be made with reference to the data in Fig. 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

9
1600
1400
1200
1000
PAR
/ μmol m–2 s–1 800
600
400
200
12:00 24:00 12:00 24:00 12:00

3.5
3.0
2.5
wind speed 2.0

/ m s–1
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
12:00 24:00 12:00 24:00 12:00
70
60
50
cavitation rate
/ number of 40
clicks per
minute 30
20
10
12:00 24:00 12:00 24:00 12:00

time of day
Fig. 3.1
10
4 The early development of an animal involves divisions of the zygote and daughter cells by mitosis
to form an embryo consisting of genetically identical cells.
Fig. 4.1 shows several cells at various stages of the cell cycle in an embryo of whitefish,
Coregonus artedi.
C A
microtubules
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Name the stage of mitosis in cell A and in cell B, shown in Fig. 4.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Fig. 4.1 shows microtubules in the cells that are dividing.
Describe the role of microtubules in mitosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

11
(iii) State what happens in cell C, shown in Fig. 4.1, until two new cells are formed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The cells produced in the developing whitefish are genetically identical.
Identify and explain two events that occur during the cell cycle that lead to daughter cells
being genetically identical.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]

12
5 Cathelicidin LL-37 is a cell signalling compound that stimulates many different cells in humans.
One role of cathelicidin LL-37 is stimulating the production of endothelial cells in the formation of
capillaries during wound healing.
(a) (i) Explain how it is possible for many different cell types to respond to the same cell
signalling compound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the appearance of the endothelial cells of a capillary.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Cathelicidin LL-37 is a protein composed of 37 amino acids.
Table 5.1 shows:
• the sequence of the first 10 amino acids in the primary structure of cathelicidin LL-37
• DNA triplets in the non-transcribed strand in the gene that codes for the first 10 amino acids
in the primary structure of cathelicidin LL-37.
Table 5.1
amino 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
acid
position
amino leu leu gly asp phe phe arg lys ser lys
acid
DNA CTG CTG GGT GAT TTC TTC CGG AAA TCT AAA
triplet
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

13
Table 5.2 shows the triplets of bases in DNA and the amino acids for which they code.
Table 5.2
second base
T C A G
TTT TCT TAT TGT T
phe tyr cys
TTC TCC TAC TGC C
T ser
TTA TCA TAA TGA stop A
leu stop
TTG TCG TAG TGG try G
CTT CCT CAT CGT T
his
CTC CCC CAC CGC C
C leu pro arg
third base
first base
CTA CCA CAA CGA A

gln
CTG CCG CAG CGG G
ATT ACT AAT AGT T
ile asp ser
ATC ACC AAC AGC C
A thr
ATA ile ACA AAA AGA A
lys arg
ATG met ACG AAG AGG G
GTT GCT GAT GGT T
asp
GTC GCC GAC GGC C
G val ala gly
GTA GCA GAA GGA A
glu
GTG GCG GAG GGG G
(b) Mutations of DNA base sequences in a gene can affect the primary structure of proteins.
Use the information in Table 5.1 and Table 5.2 to suggest the effect on the primary structure
of cathelicidin LL-37 of:
(i) the substitution of the base T with the base A in the middle of the triplet at position 5
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the deletion of base T in the triplet at position 2
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) the insertion of base G between bases G and T in the triplet at position 3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
(c) The genetic code is described as universal.
Explain why the genetic code is described as universal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Use Table 5.2 to explain why some mutations have no effect on the primary structure of
a protein.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

15
6 Fig. 6.1 shows some of the events that occur when a red blood cell flows through a capillary in
the lungs.
Cl –
HCO3–
CO2 carbonic
anhydrase
CO2 + H2O H2CO3 HCO3– + H+ plasma
X + O2 HbO2 + H+
O2 red blood cell
Fig. 6.1
(a) State why there are transport proteins in the membranes of red blood cells to allow the
movement of hydrogencarbonate ions (HCO3–) and chloride ions (Cl –).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows that chloride ions move out of the red blood cells.
Explain why this movement is necessary when red blood cells flow through capillaries in
the lungs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State why carbon dioxide molecules diffuse from the red blood cells into the plasma.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State the name of the compound indicated by X.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 9700/23/O/N/22

* 8 7 7 6 6 8 8 9 4 1 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/CT) 313406/4
2
1 (a) Table 1.1 lists cell structures that can be found in eukaryotic cells or prokaryotic cells. Some
of these cell structures can be found in both types of cell.
Complete the table using a tick (3) to show that the cell structure can be present in a particular
type of cell and a cross (✗) to show that the cell structure cannot be present.
Put a tick or a cross in every box.
The top row has been completed for you.
Table 1.1
cell structure eukaryotic cells prokaryotic cells
nucleus 3 ✗
Golgi body
circular DNA
70S ribosome
[2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

3
(b) All cells have a cell surface membrane. Fig. 1.1 shows a transmission electron micrograph of
part of two adjacent animal cells, cell 1 and cell 2.
cell 1
R
cell 2
×300 000
Fig. 1.1
In the space provided, draw a diagram of the region in the box labelled R on Fig. 1.1. Your
diagram should show the four dark lines.
Label the diagram to identify what is shown by the dark lines and each of the three spaces
between them.
space for diagram:
[3]
4
(c) Mitogens are short chains of amino acids that function as cell-signalling molecules. Mitogens
are released from secretory cells and travel in the blood to target cells, where the mitogens
bind to cell surface receptors. The target cells respond by progressing from the G1 phase to
the S phase of the mitotic cell cycle.
(i) Outline what happens in the G1 phase and S phase of the mitotic cell cycle.
G1 phase ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
S phase .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) As a result of mutation, the production and release of mitogens into the blood can be
greatly increased.
Suggest a possible consequence for target cells of increased concentrations of mitogens

in the blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

5
2 (a) Cysteine is an amino acid containing sulfur. Fig. 2.1 shows the structure of the molecule
formed by joining two cysteine molecules together.
SH
CH2 O H
H O H
C C N C C N
O H
H H CH2
SH
Fig. 2.1
Draw a circle around an R-group in the molecule shown in Fig. 2.1. [1]
(b) Goblet cells in the human gas exchange system produce proteins called mucins.
(i) The ends of mucin molecules contain many cysteine residues. Mucin strands are formed
by joining the ends of mucin molecules together through covalent bonds between
R-groups.
State the name of these covalent bonds.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Mucin strands are transported out of the goblet cells and then absorb water to form
mucus.
Suggest and explain how mucin strands are transported out of the goblet cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

6
Cystic fibrosis is a genetic disease caused by a mutation in the human CFTR gene. This results in
mucus that is thicker than normal.
(c) Suggest how thicker mucus interferes with the maintenance of healthy gas exchange surfaces
in the lungs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Row 1 and row 2 of Table 2.1 show the DNA base sequences of part of the normal CFTR
allele and the same part of a mutated CFTR allele. The base sequences shown are for the
DNA strands used in the synthesis of RNA. When Table 2.1 is completed, row 3 will show the
base sequence of the RNA synthesised from the same part of the mutated CFTR allele.
Table 2.1
1 DNA base sequence

of part of the normal T A G T A G A A A C C A
CFTR allele
2 DNA base sequence
of part of the mutated T A G T A A C C A C A A
CFTR allele
3 RNA base sequence
synthesised from the
mutated CFTR allele
(i) The difference between the DNA base sequence in row 1 and the DNA base sequence
in row 2 of Table 2.1 is caused by a single gene mutation.
State the name of this type of gene mutation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Row 1 and row 2 in Table 2.1 show the DNA strands used in the synthesis of RNA.
State the term used to describe the DNA strand that is used in the synthesis of RNA.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete Table 2.1 to show the missing bases in row 3. [1]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

7
(iv) The normal CFTR allele is approximately 189 000 base pairs in length. The CFTR
polypeptide consists of only 1480 amino acids.
Explain the reasons for this difference between the number of base pairs and the number
of amino acids.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 13]

8
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of an area of phloem tissue from a transverse section through the stem
of a squash plant, Cucurbita pepo.
companion cell
Fig. 3.1
(i) Cell X and cell Y in Fig. 3.1 are sieve tube elements.
Explain why cell X and cell Y have very different appearances in this transverse section.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

9
(ii) Sucrose is formed from the glucose synthesised by mesophyll cells in the leaves of C. pepo.
Explain how companion cells are involved in the transfer of sucrose into phloem sieve tubes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Hydrogen bonding is important in the movement of water in xylem.
(i) Explain how hydrogen bonding occurs between two water molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Outline how hydrogen bonding is involved in water transport in the xylem of a plant stem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

10
(iii) Hydrogen bonding between water molecules gives water a relatively high latent heat of
vaporisation.
Suggest why it is important to plants that water has a high latent heat of vaporisation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

11

12
4 Tuberculosis (TB), influenza and polio are examples of infectious diseases.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by an infectious disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name a species of organism that causes TB.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Immunity can be described as artificial or natural and passive or active.
Name the type of immunity that a mother gives to her baby through breast milk.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The influenza virus can mutate frequently to produce different strains of the virus. A new
vaccine is often necessary to stimulate the production of new antibodies to these new strains.
Explain why different antibodies need to be produced to give immunity to these new strains.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

13
(d) Polio is a serious viral disease affecting young children. In 1996, polio caused paralysis in
more than 75 000 children across Africa. A long-term vaccination programme allowed the
World Health Organization (WHO) to declare that Africa was largely free of polio in 2020.
(i) Explain how vaccination programmes can help to control the spread of infectious
diseases, such as polio.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Antibiotics, such as penicillin, do not help to prevent the spread of viral diseases, such
as polio.
Explain why penicillin is not effective against viruses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

14
5 Pneumonia is a severe lung disease that can interfere with gas exchange. A person with
pneumonia can be connected to an ECMO machine. This machine performs the gas exchange
functions of the lungs.
A cannula (tube) is inserted into the right atrium and this takes blood to the ECMO machine. In the
ECMO machine, blood is passed firstly to an artificial pump and then to an oxygenator, where gas
exchange occurs. The blood is then warmed and returns by another cannula to the vena cava.
(a) Complete Fig. 5.1 to show how the ECMO machine is connected to the right atrium and to the
vena cava. Use a single line to represent each cannula.
artificial
pump
ECMO
machine
oxygenator
heater
Fig. 5.1
[1]
(b) In the oxygenator, a partially permeable membrane separates the blood from air that has
been enriched with extra oxygen.
(i) State the name of a structure in the gas exchange system that has the same function as
the partially permeable membrane of the oxygenator.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

15
(ii) In the oxygenator, blood and oxygen-enriched air flow in opposite directions.
Suggest and explain how the oxygenator carries out the functions of gas exchange that
normally occur in the lungs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 5.2 is a photomicrograph showing a transverse section of part of the human aorta.
tunica media
tunica externa
×16
Fig. 5.2
Explain how the structure of the tunica media in Fig. 5.2 is different from the structure of the
tunica media in a muscular artery and relate the difference to the function of the aorta.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

16
(d) Some biologists investigated the transport of carbon dioxide in the blood of Caiman latirostris,
a type of reptile.
The biologists found that when C. latirostris respires:

• most of the carbon dioxide is converted into hydrogencarbonate ions in red blood cells
• the hydrogencarbonate ions combine with haemoglobin inside the red blood cells
• the hydrogencarbonate ions remain combined with haemoglobin until the blood reaches
the lungs.
(i) Explain why the physiology of C. latirostris requires carbonic anhydrase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the physiology of C. latirostris does not require the chloride shift.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

17

18
6 (a) Collagen is the most common structural protein in vertebrates. Collagen provides the skin
with flexibility and strength.
Explain how the structure of a collagen fibre provides the skin with strength.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The enzyme collagenase breaks down collagen. Collagenase has several important medical
uses, such as in the treatment of burnt skin.
Scientists investigated the effect of pH on the activity of collagenase at 37 °C.
The results of their investigation are shown in Fig. 6.1.
100
80
percentage 60
of maximum
activity 40
20
0
4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
pH
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

19
Explain why the activity of collagenase is lower at pH 8.0 than at the optimum pH.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/F/M/23

* 2 7 3 0 7 7 4 4 5 8 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/SG) 316054/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a cell from the stem of sago pondweed, Stuckenia
pectinata.
A
cell wall
air space B
C
G
D
F E
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) State the evidence from Fig. 1.1 that shows that the cell is from the stem of S. pectinata
and not from the mesophyll of a leaf.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete each row in Table 1.1 to identify a cell structure shown in Fig. 1.1 that carries
out the function listed.
Table 1.1
function name of cell structure letter on Fig. 1.1

gas exchange
production of subunits
of ribosomes
active transport of ions
aerobic respiration
[4]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

3
(b) Plant vacuoles develop when vesicles fuse together. The vacuoles increase in size as more
vesicles fuse.
Fig. 1.2 shows the movement of vesicles within a plant cell during the development of a
vacuole.
cell surface
membrane
multi-vesicular
rough body
endoplasmic
reticulum
Key
protein folded
correctly
protein not
folded correctly
vacuole
Golgi body
Fig. 1.2
(i) Name the process that is occurring at X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Some of the vesicles formed by the Golgi body pass to the vacuole. These vesicles
contain proteins that have been folded correctly and some that have not folded into their
correct shapes. The proteins that have not folded correctly pass to the vacuole where
they are broken down.
Explain how proteins that have not folded correctly are broken down in the vacuole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
4
(c) Small vacuoles in S. pectinata may have roles similar to lysosomes in animal cells.
Describe the role of lysosomes in animal cells in defence against pathogens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

5
Question 2 is on page 6.

6
2 Glycogen and cellulose are polymers.
Fig. 2.1 shows small, representative regions of a glycogen molecule and a cellulose molecule.
CH2OH
H O H
H
OH H
O
O
H OH
CH2
CH2OH CH2OH
H O H H O H H O H
H H H
OH H OH H OH H
O O O O
H OH H OH H OH
glycogen
CH2OH CH2OH
H OH H OH
O H H O O H H O
OH H H OH H H
H OH H H OH H
H O O H H O O
cellulose
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe three ways, visible in Fig. 2.1, in which the molecule of glycogen differs from the
molecule of cellulose.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

7
(b) Glycogen is found in the form of granules in mammalian liver and muscle cells. Fig. 2.2 is a
diagram of part of a molecule of glycogen isolated from a glycogen granule.
Fig. 2.2
Explain how the structure of glycogen is related to its function in cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain how the arrangement of cellulose molecules in plant cell walls is related to their
function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

8
3 Fig. 3.1 shows some fruits (grapes) of the grapevine, Vitis vinifera.
Fig. 3.1
Sucrose is transported in the phloem of the grapevine to the fruits. In the fruits, sucrose is
hydrolysed by the enzyme sucrase, which is found in cell walls. The glucose and fructose produced
by the hydrolysis of sucrose pass through membrane proteins, known as hexose transporters, into
the cytoplasm of the fruit cells.
(a) State why membrane proteins are required for the movement of molecules, such as glucose,
across cell surface membranes into cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Researchers investigated one type of hexose transporter, known as VvHT1, which is found
in the fruit cells of V. vinifera. They used a mutant strain of yeast that has very few hexose
transporters in its cell surface membranes to investigate the properties of VvHT1. The
researchers inserted molecules of VvHT1 into the cell surface membranes of the mutant
strain of yeast.
• Equal volumes of mutant yeast cells with VvHT1 were kept in eight different concentrations
of glucose solution.
• The rate of uptake of glucose by the yeast cells in each solution was determined.
• All the solutions were kept at the same temperature and pH.
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

9
10
6
rate of uptake
of glucose 5
–1
/ μmol min g –1
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
concentration of glucose / μmol dm–3
Fig. 3.2
(b) (i) The researchers concluded that VvHT1 is responsible for the facilitated diffusion of
glucose into the cells.
Explain how the results in Fig. 3.2 provide evidence to support this conclusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(ii) The researchers thought that grapevines could be modified to have more hexose
transporters to increase the size and quality of grapes.
Explain why increasing the number of hexose transporters could be commercially

important to growers of grapevines.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 3.3 is a diagram of a protein in the cell surface membrane of a macrophage from a
mouse.
Macrophages use these proteins in antigen presentation. Non-self antigens bind to the
proteins and are involved in the activation of specific T-lymphocytes during the immune
response.
antigen-binding
region
cytoplasm
Fig. 3.3
(i) State what is meant by a non-self antigen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

11
(ii) Some pathogens enter human cells. Macrophages partially digest these pathogens and
present antigens to T-lymphocytes during immune responses.
With reference to Fig. 3.3, explain how T-lymphocytes respond to infection by a specific
type of pathogen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 10]

12
4 The gene for the enzyme catalase is on chromosome 11 in humans.
(a) Explain the meaning of the term gene.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two enzymes, DNA polymerase and DNA ligase, are involved in the replication of DNA.
Fig. 4.1 shows the replication of part of human chromosome 11 by DNA polymerase. The
arrows show the direction of synthesis of the new polynucleotides by DNA polymerase.
3'
DNA
G
G A G Cpolymerase
T C
T G C A C T
C G
T G C G A C
T G
G A T A A C
5' C A A
A A C A G G
T T G T C C DNA
3' G T G A T polymerase
C T T
A A T G C
A C C
G G T G C
A C T
G A G A
C T
C C
5'
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

13
(i) Describe the roles of DNA polymerase and DNA ligase in the replication of DNA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) State the name of the stage of interphase in the cell cycle when DNA replication occurs.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(c) Fig. 4.2 is a diagram of chromosome 11 at metaphase of mitosis.
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the names and functions of structures A and B.
structure A .........................................................................................................................
function ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
structure B .........................................................................................................................
function ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete Fig. 4.3 to show what happens to chromosome 11 in anaphase, so that the
daughter nuclei are genetically identical.
cell surface
membrane
Fig. 4.3 [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

15
Question 5 is on page 16.

16
5 Fig. 5.1 is a longitudinal section of a capillary in muscle tissue as viewed with a transmission
electron microscope.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the evidence, visible in Fig. 5.1, that identifies the cells inside the capillary as red
blood cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain how the structure of the capillary wall is related to its functions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

17
(c) Fig. 5.2 is a diagram showing some of the events that occur as blood flows through a capillary
in a respiring tissue.
red blood cell

H 2O
CO2 + H2O
CO2 CO2
carbonic
anhydrase
H2CO3
cells of CO2 CO2 CO2
respiring
tissue O2
H+ HCO3–
O2 HCO3–
O2 O2 O2
O2
O2
Fig. 5.2
(i) An increase in respiration results in an increase in the carbon dioxide concentration in

the blood and the release of more oxygen from red blood cells to tissues.
Explain how an increase in carbon dioxide in the blood leads to the release of more
oxygen from red blood cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

18
(ii) Chloride ions are a constituent of blood plasma. The concentration of chloride ions in the
plasma of deoxygenated blood is between 2–4 mmol dm–3 lower than in the plasma of
oxygenated blood.
Explain why the concentration of chloride ions in the blood plasma of deoxygenated
blood is lower than in the plasma of oxygenated blood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

19
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram showing the passage of water through the tissues of a flowering plant from
the soil to the atmosphere. The arrows show the direction of water movement.
leaf
xylem in
stem
root
X soil particles
Fig. 6.1
(a) The structure labelled X is part of the symplast pathway. State the name of structure X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The structure labelled Y in the cell wall is a barrier to the apoplast pathway. State the name of
structure Y.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) With reference to Fig. 6.1, complete the statements about the movement of water in the
flowering plant.
Water moves from the soil solution to the cytoplasm of root hair cells by .........................
Water moves from the xylem in the root to the leaf by .......................................
Water moves from mesophyll cell walls to intercellular air spaces by ................................
Water vapour moves from intercellular air spaces to the atmosphere outside the leaf by
................................
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/21/M/J/23

* 3 8 8 8 9 4 9 2 2 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/22
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (DE/AR) 316042/2
2
1 The sinoatrial node (SAN) and the atrioventricular node (AVN) have an important role in the control
of the cardiac cycle. The timing of atrial and ventricular systole and diastole must be controlled so
that blood passes through the heart efficiently.
(a) Fig. 1.1 is a summary of blood flow through the right side of the heart during one cardiac
cycle. Three boxes in Fig. 1.1 are not complete.
Complete boxes 3, 5 and 7 in Fig. 1.1 using only the terms systole and diastole.
1 blood arrives at the heart in the superior vena cava and inferior vena cava
2 blood passes into the right atrium
3 atrial .................................................
ventricular ........................................
4 blood is forced into the right ventricle
5 atrial .................................................
ventricular ........................................
6 blood leaves the right ventricle to enter the pulmonary arteries
7 atrial .................................................
ventricular ........................................
Fig. 1.1
[2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

3
(b) Impulses sent out by the SAN pass to the AVN, where there is a short delay.
With reference to Fig. 1.1, explain why it is important for the control of the cardiac cycle that
there is a short delay at the AVN after impulses have been sent out by the SAN.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Changes in blood pressure occur in the heart during the cardiac cycle. These changes cause
the opening and closing of the bicuspid and tricuspid (atrioventricular) valves and the aortic
and pulmonary (semilunar) valves.
Explain how blood pressure changes:
• cause the opening of the tricuspid valve

• cause the opening of the pulmonary valve
• help the flow of blood through the heart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is a photomicrograph of a longitudinal section (LS) through a root tip. Two different regions
are visible:
• the root apical meristem

• the root cap.
Cells in the root cap synthesise a gel-like, sticky secretion known as mucilage, which is important
in reducing friction between soil and the growing root. It is composed mainly of polysaccharides
and also contains some amino acids and enzymes.
root apical
meristem cells
1mm
root cap
cells
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23
5
(a) Describe three differences, visible in Fig. 2.1, between root apical meristem cells and root
cap cells.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Mucilage acts as a glue to bind tiny soil particles together, forming small clumps close to the
root. These small clumps help to maintain the soil water around the root tip and prevent the
loss of water.
With reference to the cohesive and adhesive properties of water, suggest and explain how
the formation of small clumps of soil helps to maintain the soil water around the root tip.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

6
(c) Enzymes present in mucilage catalyse the breakdown of organic compounds in the soil. This
increases the presence of mineral ions in the soil.
State the term used to describe enzymes that act outside the cells that synthesise them.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The polysaccharides and amino acids present in the mucilage are a source of nutrients for
soil microorganisms that live in the area surrounding the root. Some of these microorganisms
can break down soil compounds to release mineral ions.
(i) Explain what is meant by a polysaccharide.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The soil microorganisms use amino acids to synthesise proteins. All of the twenty
different amino acids that are present in proteins have the same general structure.
Draw the general structure of an amino acid in the space provided and use this drawing
to explain how it is possible to have many different amino acids.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23
7
(iii) Mineral ions are usually present in the soil in very low concentrations. The action of
mucilage enzymes and soil microorganisms can help to increase the presence of mineral
ions.
Root hair cells are specialised for the uptake of these mineral ions and for the absorption
of water from the soil.
Suggest and explain how the presence of mineral ions in the root hair cell can increase
the absorption of water by the root hair cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]

8
3 Cells of the immune system respond to the presence of non-self antigens.
(a) Outline the features of non-self antigens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Four different types of cells of the immune system are shown in Table 3.1.
Complete Table 3.1:
• use a tick (✓) if the description applies to the named cell of the immune system
• use a cross (✗) if the description does not apply.
Table 3.1
cell of the immune system

description of cell
B-lymphocyte plasma cell T-helper cell T-killer cell
able to go through a
number of cell cycles
(clonal expansion)
main role is to secrete
cytokine during an
immune response
present during a
primary immune
response to a virus
[4]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

9
(c) The cell cycle can be divided into different parts.
Complete sentences A, B and C to provide more information about the mitotic cell cycle.
A The part of the cell cycle that occurs immediately after mitosis is
...........................................................................................................................................
B The part of the cell cycle in which the S phase occurs is
...........................................................................................................................................
C The main event that occurs during the S phase is
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]

10
4 Trypanosoma brucei is a unicellular organism that causes the infectious disease known as
sleeping sickness. Insects known as tsetse flies pass on the organism from infected people to
uninfected people when male and female tsetse flies feed on human blood.
(a) Fig. 4.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of the form of T. brucei found in human blood.
1 μm
Fig. 4.1
(i) Draw an arrow on Fig. 4.1 to indicate the location in the cell where ribosomal RNA (rRNA)
and proteins are assembled to make ribosomal subunits. [1]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 4.1, explain how the structure labelled X provides evidence that
T. brucei is motile (able to move).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

11
(iii) With reference to Fig. 4.1, explain whether T. brucei is a eukaryote or prokaryote.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Malaria is an infectious disease caused by organisms belonging to the genus Plasmodium.
(i) State the term used to describe an organism that causes disease.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name one of the species of Plasmodium that causes malaria.
Plasmodium ......................................................... [1]
(c) Outline the similarities and differences between the modes of transmission of malaria and
sleeping sickness.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]

12
5 Nucleotide and nucleoside analogues are therapeutic drugs that have a similar structure to
nucleotides or nucleosides of RNA and DNA.
A nucleoside is composed of a nitrogenous organic base (base) and a pentose sugar.
(a) The names of the bases present in RNA and DNA nucleotides can be abbreviated using a
single letter. These are shown in Table 5.1.
Complete Table. 5.1 by stating:
• the name of each base

• whether the base is a purine or pyrimidine
• whether the base is present
– only in an RNA molecule (write RNA in the table)
– only in a DNA molecule (write DNA in the table)
– in RNA and in DNA molecules (write the word both in the table).
Table 5.1
present in RNA,
base name of base purine or pyrimidine
DNA, or both
A
C
G
T
U
[4]
(b) Abacavir is an analogue drug used in the treatment of some viral diseases. It enters a cell
infected by a virus and is metabolised to the analogue carbovir triphosphate.
Fig. 5.1 shows the molecular structure of abacavir and carbovir triphosphate.
NH O
OH N
N HO O N
N P P O
HO N
N HO O O O N NH2
N NH2 P H
HO O
abacavir carbovir triphosphate
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

13
Carbovir triphosphate can be inserted into an elongating polynucleotide chain instead of a

nucleotide. This interferes with the action of DNA polymerase during the synthesis of viral
DNA.
(i) With reference to Fig. 5.1, explain whether carbovir triphosphate will replace a purine or
a pyrimidine nucleotide in the elongating polynucleotide chain.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 5.1 and the action of DNA polymerase, suggest why the conversion
of abacavir to carbovir triphosphate increases the chance of the analogue being added
to the viral polynucleotide chain.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest and explain how carbovir triphosphate interferes with the action of DNA
polymerase and how this may prevent the synthesis of viral DNA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

15
6 The Weibel Lung model was developed after an extensive study of the gas exchange system. The
model includes detailed measurements of airway diameters (lumen diameters of the airways). In
the model, different parts of the gas exchange system are identified with a generation number, as
outlined in Fig. 6.1.
airway generation number

0
trachea
1
X
2
3
bronchioles 4
5
terminal bronchioles 16
17
respiratory bronchioles
18
19
20
alveolar ducts 21
22
alveolar sacs alveoli 23
Fig. 6.1
(a) The Weibel Lung model describes how each airway divides into two.
Name the airways in generation 1, labelled X in Fig. 6.1, that branch from generation 0.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The airways are well supplied with blood. However, the airways from generation 0 to
generation 16, shown in Fig. 6.1, are not able to carry out gas exchange.
Suggest why the airways from generation 0 to generation 16 are not able to carry out gas
exchange.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

16
(c) High-resolution computed tomography (HRCT) is an imaging technique that is used to obtain
measurements of airway diameters in people with a pulmonary (lung) disease. Regular,
repeated imaging must be avoided because it involves exposure to harmful radiation.
Scientists researched the use of a different technique, HP gas MRI, that does not involve
harmful radiation. Two types of MRI image, known as projection and multi-Slice, were used to
obtain measurements of airway diameters.
Fig. 6.2 shows the results of the HP gas MRI study compared with the Weibel Lung model,
for generations 0 to 5. The Weibel Lung model was used as a standard reference for airway
diameters.
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
airway diameter
/ cm 1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Key airway generation
projection
multi-Slice
Weibel Lung model
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

17
(i) State the relationship shown in Fig. 6.2 between airway diameter and airway generation
for the Weibel Lung model data.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) With reference to the data in Fig. 6.2, explain whether HP gas MRI could be a useful
alternative to HRCT in obtaining airway diameter measurements.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/22/M/J/23

* 8 2 4 2 8 9 2 0 7 2 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/AR) 316055/1
2
1 The cells in a tissue are often at different stages of the cell cycle.
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows cells at different stages of the cell cycle.
Fig. 1.1
(i) Identify the stages of mitosis occurring in the cells labelled B and C in Fig. 1.1.
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the behaviour of the chromosomes in the stage of mitosis shown in cell A in
Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

3
(iii) Cell D in Fig. 1.1 is in interphase.
Describe the role of DNA ligase in interphase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Telomerase is an enzyme that is active during interphase in some cells.
Telomerase helps to maintain telomeres present on chromosomes.
(i) State the location of telomeres on a chromosome.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Some people with a long lifespan have cells showing a higher than normal activity of
telomerase.
Suggest why a long lifespan could result from a higher telomerase activity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

4
2 The number of cases of tuberculosis (TB) is affected by many biological, social and economic
factors.
(a) The number of reported cases of TB in the USA between 1980 and 2000 is shown in Fig. 2.1.
28 000
26 000
24 000
number of
reported
22 000
cases of TB
20 000
18 000
16 000
1980 1985 1990 1995 2000
year
Fig. 2.1
(i) Describe the trends shown in Fig. 2.1 between 1980 and 2000.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The number of reported cases of TB between 1984 and 1992 in the USA may have been
affected by an increase in the number of people infected with HIV.
Explain how an increase in the number of people infected with HIV could have affected
the number of TB cases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

5
(b) Mycobacterium tuberculosis is a species of bacterium that causes TB. Strains of

M. tuberculosis have evolved resistance to some of the antibiotics used to treat the disease.
State two ways that the impact of antibiotic resistance can be reduced.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) TB can affect every part of the human gas exchange system, including the trachea, bronchi
and alveoli.
(i) The cartilage in the bronchi can be damaged in some people with TB.
Suggest the effect that damage to cartilage may have on the bronchi.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Table 2.1 shows four types of cell and three structures found in the gas exchange system.
Complete Table 2.1 to show the distribution of cell types in each structure of the gas
exchange system.
Use a tick (3) if the cell type is present in the structure and a cross (✗) if the cell type is
not present.
Put a tick (3) or a cross (✗) in every box.
Table 2.1
cell type alveolus bronchus trachea

ciliated epithelial cell
goblet cell
smooth muscle cell
squamous epithelial cell
[3]
[Total: 11]

6
3 Blood contains white blood cells and red blood cells.
(a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph showing different types of blood cell.
Y
X
Fig. 3.1
(i) Identify cell X and cell Y in Fig. 3.1.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The width of one of the cells in Fig. 3.1 is represented by the line Z.
The actual width of cell Z is 8 µm.
Calculate the magnification used to produce the image shown in Fig. 3.1.
Write down the formula you will use to make your calculation.
formula
magnification = x ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

7
(b) Carbonic anhydrase is an enzyme found in red blood cells.
(i) Describe how carbonic anhydrase is involved in the release of oxygen from red blood
cells at respiring tissues.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Sulfonamide is a competitive inhibitor of carbonic anhydrase.
Fig. 3.2 shows the effect of increasing substrate concentration on the rate of the reaction
catalysed by carbonic anhydrase.
Sketch a curve on Fig. 3.2 to show the effect of sulfonamide on the rate of reaction
catalysed by carbonic anhydrase.
rate of
reaction
substrate concentration
Fig. 3.2
[2]
[Total: 10]

8
4 Food crops such as barley and wheat contain gluten. Gluten contains two proteins, glutenin and
gliadin.
(a) (i) Table 4.1 contains descriptions of the structures of glutenin and gliadin.
Complete Table 4.1 by writing the level of protein structure that applies to each
description.
Table 4.1
description level of protein structure

a gliadin protein is a single polypeptide that forms
a compact structure
20% of the amino acids in a glutenin molecule are
glycine
gliadin and glutenin molecules contain regions of
β-pleated sheets
[3]
(ii) Many genes in eukaryotic cells contain introns. The genes that code for gliadin do not
contain introns.
Explain how a lack of introns in a gliadin gene affects the production of mRNA from the
primary transcript.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Coeliac disease is a condition in which the immune system of a person responds to gluten in
their diet.
In coeliac disease, there is a response to the presence of peptides (short chains of amino
acids) that are produced as a result of gliadin digestion.
(i) The gliadin peptides produced as result of digestion are often as large as 33 amino acids
in length. Intestinal cells take up large numbers of these peptides at the same time.
Suggest and explain how gliadin peptides are transported into intestinal cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

9
(ii) The presence of gliadin causes the immune system of a person with coeliac disease to
respond by producing anti-gliadin antibodies.
Describe the sequence of events that results in the immune system producing anti-
gliadin antibodies.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 10]

10
5 Phloem and xylem are specialised tissues involved in the transport of water, ions and assimilates
in plants.
(a) A photomicrograph of a transverse section of a dicotyledonous stem is shown in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
Use label lines and labels to identify the phloem tissue and xylem tissue in Fig. 5.1. [2]
(b) (i) Describe how sucrose is transported in phloem sieve tubes from photosynthesising
leaves to other parts of the plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

11
(ii) Cyanide ions (CN–) inhibit the activity of an enzyme involved in respiration.
Suggest why the treatment of photosynthesising leaves with CN– results in less sucrose
being transported into phloem sieve tubes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A student was asked to carry out semi-quantitative Benedict’s tests on two solutions.
• Solution A was extracted from the cytoplasm of cells in the mesophyll tissue of
photosynthesising leaves.
• Solution B was extracted from the phloem sap in phloem sieve tubes.
The solutions were taken from the same plant, and other variables were standardised.
For each solution, the student measured the time taken for the first colour change to appear.
Suggest which of the two solutions, A or B, would change colour in the shortest time.
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

12
6 Polysaccharides, such as glycogen, are composed of thousands of monomers.
Oligosaccharides are carbohydrates that contain three to ten monomers in their chain.
(a) Nystose is one example of an oligosaccharide. The structure of nystose is shown in Fig. 6.1.
H CH2OH H CH2OH H CH2OH HO H
HO H HO H HO H H H CH2OH
OH
O O O
OH OH OH H
H H H HO O
HOH2C O C O C O H
H H H H
Fig. 6.1
State three differences between the structures of nystose and glycogen, other than the
number of monomers in the molecules.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

13
(b) Cells use oligosaccharides to synthesise glycoproteins, which are transported to cell surface
membranes.
Describe the roles of the rough endoplasmic reticulum and the Golgi body in synthesising
glycoproteins.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State one role of glycoproteins in the cell surface membrane.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 9700/23/M/J/23

Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level
* 6 0 3 7 1 5 6 9 9 5 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Electronic calculators may be used.

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (JM/CB) 164995/3
2
1 (a) Antibody molecules are proteins that show primary structure, secondary structure, tertiary
structure and quaternary structure.
Fig. 1.1 shows a ribbon diagram of an antibody molecule.
Fig. 1.1
Describe how Fig. 1.1 shows the secondary structure and tertiary structure of the antibody
molecule.
secondary structure ..................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
tertiary structure ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 is a transmission electron micrograph of a hybridoma cell.
Fig. 1.2
(i) The hybridoma cell in Fig. 1.2 synthesises and secretes molecules of a monoclonal
antibody.
State the roles of the structures labelled X and Y in the production of antibody molecules
in the hybridoma cell.
X ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
(ii) The hybridoma method for the production of monoclonal antibodies involves a number of
stages. One of these stages is the formation of hybridoma cells.
Outline the stage in which hybridoma cells are formed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Outline the use of monoclonal antibodies in the treatment of disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

5
BLANK PAGE

6
2 Linoleic acid is an unsaturated fatty acid that is found in some triglycerides and some phospholipids.
Phospholipids are components of cell membranes.
Fig. 2.1 shows a molecule of linoleic acid.
H
O
O C
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C H
H C
H C
H C H
H H H
C H H
H
H C C C C
C C
H H H H
H H
Fig. 2.1
(a) The composition of cell membranes of plants changes in response to changes in temperature.
At the start of the cold season there is an increase in the proportion of phospholipids with
unsaturated fatty acids in the chickpea, Cicer arietinum. Chickpea plants that do not make
this change do not survive.
Suggest how the increase in the proportion of phospholipids with unsaturated fatty acids
helps plants, such as chickpea, survive decreases in temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

7
(b) (i) State why triglycerides and phospholipids cannot be described as polymers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two differences in the structure of triglycerides and phospholipids.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Platelets metabolise linoleic acid to produce a molecule known as thromboxane.
Thromboxane is released by platelets when blood loss occurs. Thromboxane acts on smooth
muscle cells in the walls of arteries. This causes arteries to constrict, which reduces blood
flow.
Explain why the constriction of arteries following blood loss is an example of cell signalling.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 9]

8
3 Neutrase® is an enzyme that is used to hydrolyse proteins in solution. When the enzyme is mixed
with a 2% protein solution the reaction mixture changes from white to colourless.
A student carried out an experiment to find the effect of copper sulfate and potassium sulfate on
the activity of Neutrase®.
The student made four reaction mixtures in test-tubes A to D. Test-tubes A to C contained equal
volumes of protein solution and 0.1 cm3 of solutions of copper sulfate or potassium sulfate.
Test-tube D contained the same volume of protein solution and 0.1 cm3 of water.
0.5 cm3 of a 1% Neutrase® solution was added to test-tube A and immediately placed into a
colorimeter. The colorimeter was used to measure the intensity of light that is absorbed by the
solution (absorbance) over 100 seconds. The procedure was repeated with the other reaction
mixtures, B, C and D.
1.4
A 0.05 mol dm–3 copper sulfate
1.2
B 0.01 mol dm–3 copper sulfate
1.0
0.8
absorbance C 0.01 mol dm–3 potassium sulfate
0.6
D water
0.4
0.2
0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / s
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Suggest and explain why measuring the absorbance of the reaction mixture over 100 s
is a suitable method for determining the activity of Neutrase®.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

9
(ii) With reference to Fig. 3.1:
• describe the effects of copper sulfate solution and potassium sulfate solution on the
activity of Neutrase®
• suggest explanations for the effects that you have described.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Neutrase® can be immobilised in alginate. Immobilised Neutrase® is used in the food industry
to produce foods with high nutritional content.
Explain the advantages of using immobilised enzymes, such as Neutrase®, compared with
using the same enzymes free in solution.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
4 Meristematic tissue is found in the growing regions of plants, such as shoot tips. Meristematic
cells have a similar role to stem cells in animals.
Fig. 4.1 shows some of the stages in the formation of a mature phloem sieve tube element and
companion cells from a meristematic cell.
meristematic cell
E F
mature sieve tube element

and companion cells
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

11
(a) Cells E and F in Fig. 4.1 are daughter cells produced when the meristematic cell divides in
the shoot tip.
Explain why it is important that one of the daughter cells (cell E) is a meristematic cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Complete Table 4.1 to describe the changes that are shown in Fig. 4.1 between stages:
• F and G
• G and H
• H and J.
Table 4.1
stages description
F and G
G and H
H and J
[3]
(c) Explain how the structure of a mature sieve tube element is related to its function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
12
(d) Describe the functions of companion cells in transport in the phloem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
5 (a) The mammalian circulatory system is described as a closed double circulation.
Explain why it is called a closed and double circulation.
closed .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
double .......................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a drawing of an external view of a mammalian heart.
Two cross-sections were made of the heart:
• section 1 was made across the line A–B.

• section 2 was made across the line C–D.
Drawings of the two sections were viewed from above as shown by the arrow on Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.2 is a drawing of section A–B. Fig. 5.3 is a drawing of section C–D.
3
1
B
A B
A
D
C 2
Fig. 5.1 Fig. 5.2
C D
Y
Fig. 5.3
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19
13
(i) Name structures 1, 2 and 3, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why the wall of chamber Y is thicker than the wall of chamber X, as shown in
Fig. 5.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Explain how the contractions of the chambers of the heart are coordinated during one cardiac
cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 12]

14
6 (a) The DNA in the nucleus is known as nuclear DNA.
(i) In the cells of the grasshopper, Chorthippus brunneus, 20% of the nucleotides in nuclear
DNA contain thymine.
Calculate the percentage of nucleotides in the nuclear DNA of C. brunneus that contain
guanine and explain your answer in terms of the structure of DNA.
percentage ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) State another location, other than the nucleus, where DNA occurs in cells of C. brunneus.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of a molecule of tRNA.
The region labelled R shows detail of part of the tRNA molecule.
G
G G A
Q
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

15
(i) Complete Fig. 6.1 by writing the sequence of bases in the region labelled R. [1]
(ii) State the name of region Q and explain the role of region Q in translation.
name .........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(iii) State the function of region P.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/M/J/19

* 2 3 5 2 7 5 9 0 7 6 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (ST/CT) 166734/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram showing the structure of a section of a DNA molecule.
Key
hydrogen bond
Fig. 1.1
(a) Draw a circle around one monomer of DNA in Fig. 1.1. [1]
(b) Name the two bases forming the base pair at X in Fig. 1.1 and give a reason for your answer.
bases ........................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The statements 1–5 describe events that occur during DNA replication.
1 DNA polymerase forms a phosphodiester bond

2 DNA double helix forms
3 hydrogen bonds break
4 hydrogen bonds form
5 two strands of the double helix separate
Write the numbers 1 to 5 in the spaces below to show the order in which these events occur.
The first one has been done for you.
3
................ ................ ................ ................ ................ [1]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

3
(d) The telomere is a region found at the end of a chromosome.
Outline the function of telomeres.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is a photomicrograph showing a transverse section through a bronchus and the
surrounding lung tissue.
P Q
magnification x40
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the actual diameter of the lumen of the bronchus using the line P–Q.
Write down the formula used to make your calculation.
Show your working and give your answer to the nearest micrometre (µm).
formula
actual diameter = ................................................... µm [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

5
(b) (i) In Fig. 2.1, the area labelled R shows a section through some alveoli.
Name the tissue that lines the air spaces of the alveoli.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest how the alveoli are adapted for gas exchange.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In the leaves of plants, both gas exchange and transpiration occur through open stomata.
Suggest how the arrangement of cells in the leaf of a dicotyledonous plant contributes to the
loss of water by transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

6
(d) Fig. 2.2 shows the mean transpiration rate of a xerophyte between 08:00 and 19:00.
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
mean transpiration rate
/ arbitrary units
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 :0 9 :0 0 :0 1 :0 2 :0 3 :0 4 :0 5 :0 6 :0 7 :0 8 :0 9 :0
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
time of day
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

7
(i) Describe the data shown in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest why the transpiration rate changed between 09:00 and 10:00.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]

8
3 Cholera is an infectious disease caused by the bacterium Vibrio cholerae. The pathogen causes
disease by disrupting the activity of the epithelial cells in the human intestine.
(a) Complete Table 3.1 to compare the structure of V. cholerae and an epithelial cell from the
human intestine.
Use a tick (3) to indicate the presence of the structure.
Use a cross (7) to indicate the absence of the structure.
Table 3.1
epithelial cell from the

cell structure V. cholerae
human intestine
cell wall 3 7
ribosomes
large permanent vacuole
organelles surrounded by
a double membrane
[4]
(b) Describe the methods that can be used to prevent the spread of cholera.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

9
(c) The World Health Organization has suggested that people with HIV/AIDS take a longer time
to recover from cholera and are at an increased risk of death from cholera.
The human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) only infects certain types of cell. These cells have
CD4 receptor proteins in their cell surface membrane. Helper T-lymphocytes have CD4
receptor proteins.
(i) Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of HIV showing the glycoprotein gp120.
This glycoprotein is embedded in a membrane envelope which surrounds the viral

protein coat.
envelope
gp120
protein coat
genetic
material
Fig. 3.1
The glycoprotein gp120 is important in allowing HIV to only infect certain types of cell.
Suggest the role of gp120.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(ii) People with HIV/AIDS have a low helper T-lymphocyte count.
Explain how a low helper T-lymphocyte count could reduce the body’s ability to produce
antibodies against V. cholerae.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
4 Phloem sieve tube elements and xylem vessel elements are cells that are involved with the
transport of substances in plants.
(a) Describe two differences between the structure of a phloem sieve tube element and a xylem
vessel element.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Sucrose is transported in phloem sieve tubes.
A student carried out a test to identify the presence of sucrose in a sample of sap taken from
inside a phloem sieve tube. One of the steps in the procedure instructed the student to heat
the phloem sap with hydrochloric acid.
Explain why it is necessary to carry out this step in the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19
11
(c) The process of loading sucrose into a phloem sieve tube element involves a companion cell.
(i) Fig. 4.1 shows a stage in the process of loading sucrose into the phloem.
cell surface membrane of
companion cell
cytoplasm cellulose cell wall

of companion cell of companion cell
ATP
H+ H+
ADP + Pi
not to scale
Fig. 4.1
Companion cells contain large numbers of mitochondria and ribosomes.
Explain the roles of mitochondria and ribosomes for the stage shown in Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe and explain how sucrose is transported from the cell wall of the companion cell
into the cytoplasm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
12
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of human blood cells that have been placed in a solution of
sodium chloride.
crenated red blood cell
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the function of the cell labelled Y.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The red blood cell labelled in Fig. 5.1 is described as crenated because it has an
abnormal, shrivelled appearance.
Explain how this red blood cell has become crenated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

13
(b) Researchers studied the effect of altitude on the red blood cell count of humans. They
recorded the red blood cell count of healthy adults from populations living at four different
altitudes in a mountainous region.
Table 5.1
altitude of population mean red blood cell count

population
/ m above sea level / number of cells ×106 mm−3
A 695 4.50
B 1676 5.14
C 2003 5.04
D 2118 5.11
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in mean red blood cell count between population A
and population D.
.......................................................% [1]
(ii) Describe and suggest explanations for the data shown in Table 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

14
(c) Carbonic anhydrase is an enzyme found in red blood cells which has an important role in the
transport of respiratory gases.
Explain why a non-competitive inhibitor of carbonic anhydrase will reduce the supply of
oxygen to actively respiring tissues.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

15
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of a vertical section of the human heart and the associated blood vessels.
L
P
R
S
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete Table 6.2 by writing the letter from Fig. 6.1 that identifies each of the structures
described.
Table 6.2
structure in the heart letter

valve preventing back flow of blood into a ventricle
blood vessel carrying blood under highest pressure
chamber that pumps blood to the lungs
[3]
(b) Describe the short-term effects of nicotine on the cardiovascular system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

16
(c) Cardiac myocytes are heart muscle cells.
Fetal cardiac myocytes are present before birth and divide rapidly during fetal development.
Soon after birth the cell cycle in most of these fetal cardiac myocytes stops, forming adult
cardiac myocytes. Most of the adult cells have completed the cell cycle but in some the cell
cycle stops at the end of mitosis.
(i) State the difference between adult cardiac myocytes that have completed the cell cycle
and those that have stopped at the end of mitosis.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why it could be a disadvantage that the cell cycle has stopped in most adult
cardiac myocytes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/M/J/19

* 0 7 9 7 0 6 1 4 9 8 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SG) 166796/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the structure of the amino acid glycine.
H
H O
A N C C B
H OH
H
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the parts of the amino acid molecule labelled A and B in Fig. 1.1.
A .......................................................................................................................................
B .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Amino acids are monomers used to build proteins.
Complete Fig. 1.2 by drawing a diagram to show the formation of a peptide bond between
two molecules of glycine.
H H
H O H O
N C C N C C
H OH H OH
H H
Fig. 1.2 [3]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

3
(b) Plasma cells synthesise and secrete antibodies.
Fig. 1.3 is a transmission electron micrograph showing a plasma cell.
P Q
Fig. 1.3
(i) Use a label line and the label T on Fig. 1.3 to identify where the genes coding for the
polypeptide chains of the antibodies are located. [1]
(ii) Calculate the actual diameter of the plasma cell shown by the line P–Q.
Write down the formula used to make your calculation.
Show your working and give your answer to the nearest micrometre (µm).
formula
actual diameter = ....................................................µm [2]

4
(iii) The plasma cell in Fig. 1.3 is very metabolically active.
Suggest why there are very few mitochondria visible in the electron micrograph in
Fig. 1.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Sieve tube elements in plants have very few organelles such as mitochondria.
Explain how having very few organelles is an adaptation of the sieve tube element to its
function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

5
2 Fig. 2.1 is a transmission electron micrograph showing the bacterial pathogen that causes
tuberculosis (TB).
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Name the pathogen shown in Fig. 2.1 that causes TB.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
The World Health Organization (WHO) introduced a strategy in 2015 to end the global TB
epidemic.
An important part of the strategy is to:

• identify people at risk of becoming infected with TB
• use methods to prevent transmission of TB.
The BCG vaccination is one method of prevention recommended for use in countries where TB
is common. The BCG vaccine contains a non-pathogenic, living form of the microorganism that
causes TB.
(ii) Complete Table 2.1 by using a tick (✓) to identify the type of immunity that develops in a
person who has been given the BCG vaccination.
Table 2.1
artificial active immunity

artificial passive immunity
natural active immunity
natural passive immunity
[1]

6
(b) Rifampicin is one of the antibiotics used to treat TB.
Rifampicin inhibits RNA polymerase in bacterial cells by binding to a site other than the active
site. This prevents polypeptide synthesis.
(i) Suggest and explain how rifampicin prevents polypeptide synthesis in bacterial cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
Some bacteria have developed resistance to rifampicin. However, they are still susceptible to
the other antibiotics that can be used to treat TB.
Multi-drug resistant bacteria have developed resistance to at least two drugs, including
rifampicin.
WHO collects data from all countries on the number of cases of TB caused by
rifampicin-resistant bacteria (RR-TB) and multi-drug resistant bacteria (MDR-TB).
Fig. 2.2 shows the reported number of cases of TB between 2009 and 2013.
160 000
120 000
reported number of
cases of RR-TB
80 000
and MDR-TB
40 000
0
2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
year
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

7
(ii) Describe the trend shown by the data in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain how resistance to drugs such as rifampicin develops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]

8
3 A student carried out an experiment to investigate the effect of increasing the concentration of
sucrose solution on the mass of potato tissue.
• Potato tissue was cut into cylinders of equal length and diameter.
• The mass of each cylinder was recorded.
• Each cylinder was put into a solution of sucrose, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
bung
test-tube
sucrose solution
potato cylinder
Fig. 3.1
• After one hour each cylinder was removed, blotted dry and reweighed.
• The percentage change in mass of each cylinder was calculated.
• The experiment was repeated three times.
• The mean percentage change in mass of the potato cylinders in each sucrose solution was
calculated.
Fig. 3.2 shows the results of this investigation.
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

9
15
mean
10
percentage
change in
mass of the
potato
cylinder 5
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
concentration of sucrose
/ mol dm–3
–5
–10
–15
–20
–25
–30
–35
–40
–45
–50
Fig. 3.2
10
(a) With reference to Fig. 3.2, describe the effect of increasing the concentration of sucrose
solution on the mass of the potato cylinders.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Explain why there was a change in mass for the potato cylinders in 0.6 mol dm–3 sucrose
solution.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

11
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a photomicrograph of a human blood smear.
Fig. 4.1
Name the cells labelled A and B in Fig. 4.1.
A ..............................................................................................................................................
B ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Blood and lymph are both fluids that transport substances within the human body.
(i) Table 4.1 shows components found in both blood and lymph.
Complete Table 4.1 to show whether the concentration of each of these components is
higher or lower or the same in the lymph, when compared with the concentration in the
blood in the aorta.
You may use the words higher or lower or same once, more than once or not at all.
Table 4.1
component concentration in lymph

compared to the concentration
in blood in the aorta
oxygen
carbon dioxide
red blood cells
[2]

12
(ii) The presence of a pathogen infecting the body leads to an increase in the concentration
of protein in lymph.
Suggest an explanation for this increase in protein concentration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Blood is circulated around the body by the heart.
The action of the heart is coordinated and controlled by structures located in its walls, such as
the sinoatrial node (SAN) and the atrioventricular node (AVN).
(i) Describe the role of the SAN.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In a healthy heart, the AVN provides the only pathway for electrical impulses to travel
from the atria to the ventricles.
The bundle of Kent is a structure found in the heart in a small number of people.
Some electrical impulses do not pass through the AVN but travel directly from the atria to
the ventricles through the bundle of Kent.
Suggest and explain the effects that the presence of the bundle of Kent may have on
heart rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

13
5 Myasthenia gravis is a condition that results in muscle weakness by affecting the immune
response.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term immune response.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Myasthenia gravis is an autoimmune disease which disrupts a cell signalling pathway
involving muscle cells.
(i) Suggest how the immune system acts to disrupt this cell signalling pathway.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
Enzyme Y is found in the cell surface membrane of muscle cells. Enzyme Y acts to break
down the cell signalling molecules which trigger muscle contraction when they are no longer
needed.
(ii) Using the induced fit hypothesis of enzyme action, explain how enzyme Y breaks down
the cell signalling molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

14
(c) Rituximab is a monoclonal antibody used in the treatment of myasthenia gravis.
Rituximab acts against the cell surface membrane protein CD20. This protein is found on the
surface of the B-lymphocytes that cause myasthenia gravis.
Explain the advantages of using monoclonal antibodies in the treatment of diseases such as
myasthenia gravis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

15
6 (a) Outline the role of DNA polymerase in the replication of DNA.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Floxuridine is a drug used to treat cancer.
(i) Floxuridine inhibits DNA replication.
Suggest why the inhibition of DNA replication is an effective treatment for cancer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Floxuridine prevents thymine nucleotides being produced.
Explain why floxuridine does not affect transcription.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 6.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of a lung cancer cell in a stage of the cell cycle.
Fig. 6.1
(i) Name the stage of the cell cycle occurring in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
16
(ii) Explain why smoking tobacco increases the risk of developing lung cancer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 9700/21/O/N/19

* 0 2 8 6 5 0 6 2 4 4 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (ST/CT) 165347/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of a molecule of haemoglobin.
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the structure labelled A on Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the function of structure A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Haemoglobin is described as a globular protein. Explain why this protein is described as
globular.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

3
(c) The gene HBB codes for the β-globin polypeptide.
State why a polypeptide, such as β-globin, is described as a polymer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A single base change in the DNA of the gene HBB results in a change to the amino acid
sequence of β-globin. In the sequence, a single glutamic acid is replaced by valine.
Outline the effects of this change in the amino acid sequence of β-globin on the structure and
function of a haemoglobin molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Haemoglobin interacts with carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide.
Outline the role of haemoglobin in the transport of carbon dioxide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]

4
2 Meristematic tissue is found in the growing region of plants, such as root tips.
Fig. 2.1 shows a section through the meristematic region of a root tip of onion, Allium cepa.
H
A
G B
F
C
E
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1 shows the numbers of cells in different stages of the cell cycle that were observed in
sections of the meristematic regions of root tips of A. cepa.
Table 2.1
one example number of cells counted in each stage

stage of cell
of cell from
cycle
Fig. 2.1 replicate 1 replicate 2 replicate 3 mean
interphase 4686 4709 4808 4734

prophase 148 159 155 154
metaphase 38 47 40 42
anaphase 25 33 28 29
telophase 38 47 39 41
total 5000
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

5
(a) Complete Table 2.1 by using the letters A to H from Fig. 2.1 to identify one cell in each stage
of the cell cycle. [3]
(b) The total length of time taken for meristematic cells of A. cepa to complete one cell cycle at
25 °C is 12 hours.
Using sections similar to the one in Fig. 2.1, the length of time spent in each stage of the cell cycle
can be estimated. To obtain the estimate, the percentage of cells in that stage is calculated.
Using the data in Table 2.1, calculate:
• the percentage of cells in anaphase

• the mean length of time in minutes for anaphase.
Show your working.
percentage of cells in anaphase = ........................................................... %
mean length of time in anaphase = ........................................................ min

[2]
(c) State one event that occurs during cytokinesis in the cell cycle of plant cells, such as those
shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

6
3 (a) The tomato plant, Solanum lycopersicum, does not tolerate periods of drought (water
shortage). Researchers have produced a tomato plant that has an improved tolerance of
drought.
The researchers measured the width and the length of open stomata in plants that are tolerant
of drought and tomato plants that are not tolerant.
Fig. 3.1 is the formula used to calculate the size of an open stoma (stomatal aperture).
width of open stoma

stomatal aperture =
length of open stoma
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the mean stomatal aperture of the two groups of tomato plants.
Fig. 3.3 shows the rates of transpiration of the two groups of tomato plants when kept in
identical conditions of drought.
0.40
0.35 3.50
0.30 3.00
0.25 2.50
mean stomatal transpiration rate
aperture 0.20 / mmol water 2.00
m–2s–1
0.15 1.50
0.10 1.00
0.05 0.50
0.00 0.00
drought non-drought drought non-drought
tolerant tolerant tolerant tolerant
Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

7
The water uptake of leafy shoots taken from the two groups of tomato plants was measured
using potometers. The leafy shoots were of similar mass and had the same number of leaves.
40.00
35.00
30.00
mean water
uptake 25.00
/ cm3 per
shoot 20.00
15.00
10.00
5.00
0.00
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
time / h
drought tolerant
non-drought tolerant
Fig. 3.4
With reference to Fig. 3.2, Fig. 3.3 and Fig. 3.4, describe and explain the differences between
the plants that are drought tolerant and the plants that are non-drought tolerant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]

8
(b) The nuclei of plants produce small lengths of RNA known as microRNAs.
MicroRNAs in guard cells have been shown to prevent the synthesis of some proteins.
The guard cells of the drought-tolerant tomato plants produced more microRNA molecules
than the guard cells of the non-tolerant plants.
MicroRNA molecules do not prevent transcription but interact with messenger RNA (mRNA).
Suggest how this microRNA can interact with mRNA to prevent the production of proteins in
guard cells of S. lycopersicum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
4 In mammals, arteries branch to form smaller blood vessels called arterioles.
Arterioles branch to form capillaries that supply blood to tissues.
(a) Explain the ways in which the structure of an artery is adapted to its function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

9
Fig. 4.1 shows transmission electron micrographs of cross-sections through an arteriole and a
capillary.
lumen lumen
arteriole magnification ×2000 capillary magnification ×6500
Fig. 4.1
(b) (i) Identify the cells inside the lumen of the arteriole in Fig. 4.1 and state one reason for
your identification.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the differences between the arteriole and the capillary that are visible in
Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
10
Fig. 4.2 shows a capillary network in a mammalian tissue.
The arrows indicate the direction of flow of body fluids.
artery
X
arteriole
capillaries
not to scale
Fig. 4.2
(c) (i) Capillaries have a role in the formation of tissue fluid.
Explain how tissue fluid is formed in the capillary network.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

11
(ii) The vessels labelled X in Fig. 4.2 carry excess tissue fluid back into the circulatory
system.
Name the fluid inside the vessels labelled X and state one way in which its composition
differs from blood plasma.
name of fluid ......................................................................................................................
difference ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]

12
5 Influenza is an infectious disease caused by the influenza A virus. This virus causes influenza in
birds and mammals.
Fig. 5.1 is a diagram of an influenza A virus.
Haemagglutinin allows the virus to attach to host cells by binding to receptors on the cell surface
membrane of the host cells.
Neuraminidase is an enzyme that helps the virus to leave host cells after the virus has replicated.
haemagglutinin
neuraminidase
100 nm
Fig. 5.1
(a) State two features of all viruses that are visible in Fig. 5.1.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Neuraminidase removes parts of the host cell receptors that bind to haemagglutinin. This
helps newly-formed viruses to leave host cells.
Drugs have been developed to act on neuraminidase. These drugs prevent viruses from
leaving host cells.
Suggest and explain how these drugs act to prevent viruses leaving cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19
13
(c) The human immune system produces antibodies in response to the presence of antigens,
such as neuraminidase and haemagglutinin.
Outline the events that occur during an immune response leading to the production of
antibodies against an antigen, such as haemagglutinin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Researchers are developing methods to produce antibodies to give artificial passive immunity
to influenza.
(i) Suggest the advantages and disadvantages of artificial passive immunity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State two ways in which mammals can acquire natural passive immunity to infectious
diseases, such as influenza.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]

14
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the cell surface membrane of a squamous epithelial cell lining an alveolus.
A B
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) A student measured the line A–B and calculated the actual width of the membrane in
Fig. 6.1.
State the unit that the student should use for the actual width of the membrane.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 6.1, state how to identify the external surface of the cell surface
membrane.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

15
(b) Name R and S in Fig. 6.1 and describe their roles in the membrane.
component R
name .........................................................................................................................................
role ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
component S
name .........................................................................................................................................
role ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 9700/23/O/N/19

Cambridge International Examinations
* 0 0 3 5 4 4 2 3 7 0 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

DC (KN/SG) 147459/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a cell from the root of thale cress, Arabidopsis
thaliana.
A B
1.0 μm
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) The structures labelled A and B on Fig. 1.1 are sections of two mitochondria.
Suggest why A and B are different shapes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The structure labelled D on Fig. 1.1 is a mitochondrion about to divide.

Explain the importance of the division of mitochondria for the cell shown in Fig. 1.1 and
for cells in the root tips of thale cress.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18
3
(b) Within a cell, substances move between the nucleus and the cytoplasm. The area labelled C
in Fig. 1.1 shows an area where this communication occurs.
Make a large, labelled drawing of area C to show where this communication occurs.
[2]
(c) Outline the functions of the nucleus in non-dividing cells, such as the cell in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) Sucrose is a disaccharide.
Fig. 2.1 shows how sucrose is broken down in a reaction with hydrochloric acid.
CH2OH
O O
H H HOCH2 H
H
OH H O H HO
HO CH2OH
H OH OH H
+H2O
CH2OH
O O
H H HOCH2 H
H
OH H H HO
HO OH HO CH2OH
H OH OH H
A B
Fig. 2.1
(i) Name the products, A and B, of the reaction shown in Fig. 2.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the type of bond that is broken in the reaction shown in Fig. 2.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State the type of reaction shown in Fig. 2.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When Benedict’s solution is added to a sucrose solution and put into a boiling water-bath, no
change in colour is observed.
State why no colour change is observed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18
5
(c) Sugar beet plants, Beta vulgaris, store sucrose in their roots.
Describe and explain how sucrose is transported from the phloem in the leaves of sugar beet
to storage tissues in the root.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 10]

6
3 Researchers isolated a sucrase enzyme from the bacterium Bacillus subtilis. They immobilised
the enzyme in alginate beads.
The researchers investigated the effects of temperature on the activity of the immobilised sucrase
compared with the activity of the same enzyme free in solution.
100
key
immobilised
sucrase
80 sucrase free in
solution
percentage of 60
maximum
enzyme
activity
40
20
0
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
temperature / °C
Fig. 3.1
(a) With reference to Fig. 3.1, compare the effects of temperature on the activity of immobilised
sucrase with the activity of sucrase free in solution.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18
7
The researchers also investigated the effects of pH on the activity of the immobilised sucrase
compared with its activity free in solution.
100
key
immobilised
sucrase
80 sucrase free in
solution
percentage of 60
maximum
enzyme
activity
40
20
0
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
pH
Fig. 3.2
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows that immobilised sucrase remains active over a wider range of pH compared
with sucrase free in solution.
Suggest reasons for the higher activity of immobilised sucrase over the range of pH between
5.5 and 8.0.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

8
(c) State one variable that the researchers should keep constant in both investigations and
explain your answer in terms of enzyme action.
variable .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) There are many advantages of using immobilised enzymes in industry.
Suggest two advantages of using immobilised enzymes in industry other than remaining
active over a greater range of pH.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18

9
4 Fig. 4.1 is a ribbon model of a molecule of haemoglobin.
E
A chemical group that is
not made from amino acids.
F
A form of secondary structure
found in the polypeptides in
haemoglobin.
G
Each polypeptide is folded
to form a complex
three-dimensional shape.
H
Each polypeptide is made
of a sequence of amino acids.
J
Each haemoglobin molecule
is composed of four polypeptides,
shown here by different shading.
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the term that matches each of the descriptions given in boxes E, F, G, H and J in
Fig. 4.1.
E ...............................................................................................................................................
F ...............................................................................................................................................
G ...............................................................................................................................................
H ...............................................................................................................................................
J ................................................................................................................................................
[5]

10
(b) The effect of carbon dioxide on the percentage saturation of haemoglobin with oxygen was
investigated.
A sample of mammalian blood was exposed to a gas mixture that contained increasing
partial pressures of oxygen (p O2). Throughout the investigation the partial pressure of carbon
dioxide (p CO2) was maintained at 5.3 kPa. The percentage saturation of haemoglobin in the
sample was determined as the p O2 increased.
The investigation was repeated with a second sample of blood in which the p CO2 was
maintained at 10.7 kPa.
100
90
80
p CO2 5.3 kPa
70
p CO2 10.7 kPa
60
percentage
saturation of
haemoglobin 50
with oxygen
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
p O2 / kPa
Fig. 4.2
(i) The p O2 in alveolar air is 13.0 kPa and the p CO2 is 5.3 kPa.
Use Fig. 4.2 to suggest the percentage saturation of haemoglobin in blood entering the
pulmonary veins.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18

11
(ii) Use the information in Fig. 4.2 to state and explain the effect of increasing p CO2 in
muscle tissues during strenuous exercise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 10]

12
5 (a) The toxins released by some pathogenic bacteria can be altered chemically so that they are
harmless. These harmless toxins are called toxoids.
Toxoids are used in vaccines to provide protection against some infectious diseases.
Describe the response of the immune system to the injection of a toxoid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Myasthenia gravis (MG) is described as an autoimmune disease. It is a long-term condition

that results from a failure of the immune system.
(i) Explain why MG is known as an autoimmune disease.
..........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18

13
(ii) Suggest why MG is a long-term condition.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
Question 6 starts on page 14

14
6 Water absorbed by plant roots travels by different pathways from root hairs to the xylem.
Fig. 6.1 shows these pathways in the root of Ranunculus acris.
cell A
xylem vessel
root hair
key
pathway B
pathway C
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name cell A and pathway B as shown in Fig. 6.1.
cell A .........................................................................................................................................
pathway B .................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18

15
(b) Transpiration occurring at the leaves is mainly responsible for movement of water across the
root of R. acris.
Explain how transpiration is responsible for the movement of water across the root as shown
in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(c) Explain why the movement of water in pathway C is slower than in pathway B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

16
(d) Ions are taken up by root hair cells using active transport and facilitated diffusion.
Describe two ways in which facilitated diffusion differs from active transport.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/M/J/18

* 1 1 8 4 8 0 4 9 7 3 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/SG) 147457/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph of root tip meristem. Different stages of the cell cycle are visible.
Some cells are in the same stage of the cell cycle and some are in the same stage of mitosis.
G A
F
B
C
E
Fig. 1.1
(a) Cell D and cell E are in the same stage of the cell cycle.
State the difference between the nucleus of cell D and cell E.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Name the stage of mitosis occurring in each of cells A, B and C.
cell A .........................................................................................................................................
cell B .........................................................................................................................................
cell C .....................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Cells F and G are newly formed cells. Cytokinesis has occurred with the formation of a cell
plate.
Describe the events that have occurred in the stage of mitosis immediately before cytokinesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

3
2 Adipose tissue, which is composed of cells known as adipocytes, stores large quantities of
triglycerides and functions as an energy storage tissue.
Fig. 2.1 is a photomicrograph of adipose tissue.
Fig. 2.1
(a) Adipocytes can be very large in size compared to other body cells. This is due to a large lipid
droplet within the cell.
The largest adipocyte in Fig. 2.1 has a mean diameter of 35 µm. A person with good eyesight
can see cells of 0.05 mm or greater diameter without a magnifying glass or any other optical
aid.
State whether the person can see this adipocyte without any optical aid. Show your working
to justify your answer.
......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Only some of the organelles within the adipocyte can be seen using a high quality light
microscope set at the highest magnification.
Organelles such as rough endoplasmic reticulum, smooth endoplasmic reticulum and

ribosomes are only visible using an electron microscope.
Explain why these organelles are not visible using a light microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

4
(c) Adipocytes synthesise triglyceride lipase (ATGL), an enzyme that catalyses the formation or
breakdown of triglycerides, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
lipase
triglyceride fatty acids + glycerol
Fig. 2.1
The balance between triglyceride formation and breakdown is controlled by hormones.

Fig. 2.2 is a summary of events occurring in an adipocyte when glycogen energy stores have
been used up.
tissue hormone
fluid
cell surface
membrane
ATP second messenger

molecule
cytoplasm
inactive enzyme active enzyme
inactive ATGL active ATGL
triglyceride fatty acids + glycerol
Fig. 2.2
(i) Name the type of bond broken by active ATGL to produce fatty acids and glycerol.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name and outline the process by which the fatty acids shown in Fig. 2.2 exit the cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18
5
(iii) Fig. 2.2 is an example of cell signalling within the body.
With reference to Fig. 2.2, outline the process of cell signalling.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) The fatty acids released from adipocytes are transported in blood plasma and are taken up
by cells.
Although most cell types can metabolise fatty acids to synthesise ATP in the presence of
oxygen, red blood cells cannot do this.
Suggest why red blood cells cannot metabolise fatty acids to synthesise ATP.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 12]

6
3 Nerium oleander is a xerophytic plant. A photomicrograph of a section through the leaf of

N. oleander is shown in Fig. 3.1.
palisade mesophyll cell
vein
Fig. 3.1
(a) The leaf shown in Fig. 3.1 has a number of adaptations to reduce water loss by transpiration.
Two of these adaptations are:
• a multilayered epidermis
• stomata only found in depressions, known as stomatal crypts, on the lower surface of the
leaf.
Explain how a multilayered epidermis and stomatal crypts will help to reduce water loss in
N. oleander.
multilayered epidermis ..............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
stomatal crypts .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

7
Sucrose, amino acids and other assimilates synthesised in palisade mesophyll cells of N. oleander
pass to the vein, where they can be transported within specialised cells from the source to the
sink.
(b) Name the cells specialised for the transport of assimilates in N. oleander.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain the difference between a source and a sink.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

8
One of the enzymes involved in the synthesis of sucrose in the cytoplasm of palisade mesophyll
cells is known as cyFBPase. The gene coding for this enzyme is cyFBP.
The importance of cyFBPase in plant growth can be investigated using plants with a mutation in
gene cyFBP. These plants cannot synthesise cyFBPase.
(d) (i) State what is meant by a gene mutation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one way in which the mutation of cyFBP prevents the synthesis of cyFBPase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Monoclonal antibody can be produced that is specific to cyFBPase. This antibody is used by
investigators to check that the plants with the cyFBP mutation do not synthesise this enzyme.
(i) In monoclonal antibody production, a small mammal is inoculated with cyFBPase and
several weeks later cells are removed from the spleen. Some of these cells are required
for the production process.
Describe the events occurring within the body of the small mammal that lead to the
formation of the cells needed for monoclonal antibody production.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

9
(ii) Anti-cyFBPase monoclonal antibody is added to extracts taken from the leaves of the
plants with the cyFBP mutation.
State the expected results following addition of the monoclonal antibody that would
confirm the absence of cyFBPase in the leaf extracts.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(f) Investigations have shown that plants with the cyFBP mutation grow to a much smaller height
and have proportionately far less starch stored in their roots than normal plants.
Suggest why plants with the cyFBP mutation will store less starch in their roots.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 15]

10
4 Oxygen enters the blood stream from the alveoli in the lungs and carbon dioxide leaves the
bloodstream to enter the alveoli. Most of the oxygen is carried by haemoglobin in red blood cells
to the body tissues.
(a) Outline how oxygen enters the blood stream from an alveolus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
Fig. 4.1 is an oxygen dissociation curve for adult haemoglobin. The curve shows the affinity of
haemoglobin for oxygen at the range of partial pressures found in the body.
The values for plotting the curve are obtained in the laboratory by bubbling oxygen at different
partial pressures through a solution of haemoglobin at 37 °C and pH 7.4. At a different temperature
or pH the measured values will change, resulting in a different oxygen dissociation curve.
100
80
60
percentage
saturation of
haemoglobin
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
partial pressure
of oxygen / kPa
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18
11
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows that the percentage saturation of haemoglobin changes at different partial
pressures of oxygen.
(i) Use Fig. 4.1 to calculate the difference in percentage saturation of haemoglobin at the
lower partial pressure of oxygen of 2.7 kPa compared to the higher partial pressure of
13.0 kPa.
Show your working.
difference = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Explain the advantage of having a difference in percentage saturation of haemoglobin at

lower and higher partial pressures of oxygen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]

12
In a person with sickle cell anaemia, the ability of haemoglobin to transport oxygen and carbon
dioxide is severely affected.
The cause of this disease is a mutation in the gene coding for the β-globin polypeptide of
haemoglobin.
(c) Define the term disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Outline the differences between the HbA (normal) and HbS (sickle cell) alleles of the gene
coding for the β-globin polypeptide and explain how these differences lead to a change in the
haemoglobin molecule formed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

13

14
5 The fig tree, Ficus carica, and the papaya tree, Carica papaya, produce a milky-looking fluid
known as latex. The latex is released when plant tissue is wounded and it is thought to act as a
defence against attack by herbivorous insects or parasitic worms.
Latex is a complex mixture of substances and the exact composition of the mixture depends on
the plant species. A group of enzymes that hydrolyse proteins, known as cysteine proteases, are
commonly found in latex.
Ficin, found in F. carica, and papain, found in C. papaya, are both cysteine protease enzymes.
These enzymes have been extracted and purified for use commercially.
(a) An investigation was carried out to compare the effect of temperature on the activity of ficin
and papain.
100
papain
80
ficin
percentage
60
of maximum
activity
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 45 50 55 60 70 80
temperature / °C
Fig. 5.1
(i) With reference to Fig. 5.1, describe the differences between the activity of papain
compared to the activity of ficin between 20 °C and 80 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

15
(ii) Ficin and papain have been shown to be effective in the digestion of parasitic nematodes
(roundworms).
With reference to Fig. 5.1, explain which enzyme you would select to use in an oral
medication for the treatment of human intestinal parasitic nematodes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) One commercial use of the enzyme ficin is the production of Fab fragments (antigen binding
regions) of mouse IgG antibodies for use in immunological studies. The process uses
immobilised ficin to cleave (cut) the antibodies in the hinge region.
Suggest one practical advantage of using immobilised ficin for this process, rather than ficin
free in solution.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Streptococcus pyogenes is a bacterium that can cause a range of diseases in humans.
S. pyogenes synthesises streptopain, a cysteine protease that hydrolyses structural proteins

in human connective tissue.
(i) Streptopain is secreted to the outside of the cell.

State the term given to an enzyme that is produced by a cell and is then secreted to the
outside, where it has its action.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one example of a structural protein in connective tissue that can be hydrolysed
by streptopain.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

16
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a list of infectious diseases. Each of the statements A to D describes a feature that
applies to one or more of these diseases.
cholera
HIV/AIDS
malaria
measles
smallpox
tuberculosis (TB)
Fig. 6.1
For each of the statements A, B, C and D, name all the diseases in Fig. 6.1 that match the
feature described.
A The causative organism of the disease is a virus.
...........................................................................................................................................
B The causative organism of the disease is a prokaryote.
...........................................................................................................................................
C The disease is transmitted by a faecal-oral route, for example, sewage containing the
pathogen contaminates drinking water.
...........................................................................................................................................
D The causative organism of the disease spends part of its life cycle inside an insect, which
acts as a vector of the disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

17
(b) Although many infectious diseases are caused by prokaryotic organisms, there are some that
are caused by eukaryotic organisms.
Complete Table 6.1 to show some differences between a prokaryotic cell and a eukaryotic
cell.
Table 6.1
prokaryotic cell eukaryotic cell
no true nucleus, genetic material not true nucleus, genetic material enclosed by
enclosed a double membrane known as a
..................................................................
........................................................ DNA linear DNA
70S ribosomes only 70S and ................ ribosomes
no double membrane-bound organelles double membrane-bound organelles

such as
..................................................
cell wall contains where cell wall is present, generally

contains mainly cellulose or chitin
..............................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/M/J/18

* 1 0 0 0 8 4 9 2 6 5 *
BIOLOGY 9700/21
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SC/SW) 148754/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the human gas exchange system.
Fig. 1.1
(a) Name the structures labelled A, B, and C in Fig. 1.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C .......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Name a non-infectious disease that affects the human gas exchange system.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Malaria is an infectious disease.
Name the pathogen that causes malaria.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) There are a number of vaccines being developed to help control the spread of malaria.
Explain why vaccination programmes have not been able to eradicate malaria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18
3
(e) Fig. 1.2 shows the distribution of malaria in the Americas in 2012.
Key
area P = countries where
malaria is always present
area Q = countries where
malaria is not present
Fig. 1.2
Suggest the factors, other than lack of vaccines, that could be restricting the distribution of
malaria to area P.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 12]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the disaccharide lactose, which is found in milk.
CH2OH CH2OH
OH O H O H
H H
OH H O OH H
H H OH
H OH H OH
Fig. 2.1
(a) Name the type of bond that joins the two monosaccharides in lactose.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The enzyme lactase catalyses the breakage of the bond between the two monosaccharides
in lactose.
(i) Name the type of reaction that breaks this bond.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Some people do not produce the enzyme lactase, so cannot digest lactose.
The presence of lactose in the lumen of the intestine reduces the volume of water
absorbed into the blood, resulting in diarrhoea.
Suggest why the presence of lactose in the intestine reduces the volume of water
absorbed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

5
(c) Enzymes, such as lactase, are often immobilised for use in the food industry.
A scientist carried out an investigation to determine the effects of temperature on the activity
of lactase when it was immobilised and when it was free in solution.
The scientist produced alginate beads containing lactase for use in this investigation. The
beads varied in size. The scientist selected small beads for the investigation and put them
into a glass column.
(i) Suggest the advantage of using small beads rather than large beads.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
(ii) Fig. 2.2 shows the results of the investigation to determine the effects of temperature on
the activity of lactase when it was immobilised, I, and when it was free in solution, F.
100
Key
I immobilised
90 lactase
F lactase free
in solution
80
70
60
percentage
of maximum
activity
50
40
30
20
10
0 F
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
temperature / °C
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

7
With reference to Fig. 2.2, compare the effect of temperature on the activity of immobilised
lactase, I, and lactase free in solution, F.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

8
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a transmission electron micrograph showing two adjacent cells in a leaf.
cell wall
Fig. 3.1
(i) Cellulose is the main polysaccharide in cell walls of plants.
Describe the structure of cellulose.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State one feature visible in Fig. 3.1, other than the cell wall, that identifies the cells as
plant cells.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

9
(iii) Outline the role of ATP in a leaf cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
Water is a main component of plant cells.
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows two water molecules linked by a hydrogen bond.
O hydrogen bond
H H
O
H H
Fig. 3.2
Explain how hydrogen bonding occurs between water molecules.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Suggest why water is an excellent solvent for ions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 Fig. 4.1 is a photomicrograph of a cross-section of a tubular structure in the kidney made from
epithelial cells.
cell A
Fig. 4.1
(a) The actual length of epithelial cell A along the line P–Q is 35 µm.
Calculate the magnification of the image shown in Fig. 4.1. Write down the formula and use it
to make your calculation. Show your working.
formula
magnification × .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

11
(b) Some epithelial cells in the kidney release the protein vascular endothelial growth factor
(VEGF). This protein is a cell signalling molecule that stimulates cell division in endothelial
cells in blood vessels.
(i) State what occurs during interphase to prepare a cell for division.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how a cell signalling molecule, such as VEGF, can lead to a response in a cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Uncontrolled cell division may result in a tumour. Tumour cells in the kidney respond to VEGF.
Kidney cancer can be treated with monoclonal antibodies. These monoclonal antibodies bind
to VEGF.
Outline the hybridoma method for the production of monoclonal antibodies that will target the
VEGF protein.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Monoclonal antibodies used as a treatment need to be given more than once. Repeated
treatment can cause side effects to the person or can become less effective.
Suggest why repeated treatment with monoclonal antibodies may have these effects.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
12
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the structure of a prokaryotic cell.
capsule
DNA
cytoplasm
ribosome
cell wall
flagellum
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.1 has not been fully labelled to confirm that the cell is prokaryotic.
State what other information could be added to two of the labels to confirm that this cell is
prokaryotic and not eukaryotic.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Some prokaryotes are plant pathogens.
Liberibacter is a group of prokaryotic plant pathogens that causes severe damage to a variety
of plant crops across the world.
Scientists made observations about plants infected with these pathogens compared to
uninfected plants:
• starch accumulates in the leaves
• starch does not accumulate in roots and other storage organs
• fruits are smaller
• the pathogen is widely distributed throughout the plant and is found in a number of
different organs including the root and leaf.
The scientists deduced that the pathogen infected the phloem tissue.
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

13
Suggest why the scientists were able to deduce that the pathogen infected the phloem tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) DNA and RNA both contain nucleotides with adenine.
Complete Table 5.1 to compare:
• a DNA nucleotide with adenine

• an RNA nucleotide with adenine
• ATP.
Table 5.1
feature DNA nucleotide RNA nucleotide with ATP

with adenine adenine
contains nitrogen
(yes or no)
contains a
pyrimidine base
(yes or no)
number of
phosphate groups
name of the sugar

component
[5]
[Total: 9]

14
6 (a) Haemoglobin is a globular protein which is able to transport oxygen and is soluble in water.
(i) Explain how the structure of a haemoglobin molecule makes it able to transport oxygen
efficiently.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain how the structure of a haemoglobin molecule allows it to be soluble in water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Llamas are mammals that are adapted to live at high altitudes.
Fig. 6.1 shows oxygen dissociation curves for haemoglobin of llamas and humans.
(i) The partial pressure of oxygen in the lungs of mammals at 3500 m is 6.4 kPa.
Use Fig. 6.1 to state the percentage saturation of haemoglobin of llamas and humans at
an oxygen partial pressure of 6.4 kPa.
llamas .................. %
humans .................. % [1]
(ii) With reference to Fig. 6.1, explain the advantage to llamas of having an oxygen
dissociation curve positioned to the left of the curve for humans.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18
15
100
llama
90
human
80
70
60
percentage
saturation
of haemoglobin
with oxygen 50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
oxygen partial pressure / kPa
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/21/O/N/18

* 3 4 6 7 1 5 9 5 7 8 *
BIOLOGY 9700/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (SC/SW) 148752/4
2
1 (a) Aphids are small insects which feed directly on phloem sap.
The salivary glands of aphids have secretory cells that make and release a variety of proteins
that assist in feeding.
Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a small area of a salivary gland cell of an
aphid.
mitochondrion
Golgi bodies
Fig. 1.1
Describe the role of Golgi bodies in secretory cells, such as the salivary gland cells of aphids.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18
3
(b) (i) Explain why secretory cells have large numbers of mitochondria.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Mitochondria are partly controlled by the nucleus, but can also function independently.
Suggest the features of mitochondria that allow them to function independently of the
nucleus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Aphids are important vectors of plant viral diseases.
(i) Describe the structure of a typical virus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest how viruses are able to pass from one plant cell to the next without crossing
membranes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

4
2 (a) Proteins are macromolecules composed of many amino acids.
(i) Two amino acids are represented in the diagram in Fig. 2.1.
Complete the diagram to show how the two amino acids react together to form a
dipeptide.
R1 R2
H O H O
N C C + N C C
H H OH H H OH
Fig. 2.1
[3]
(ii) State what is represented by R1 and R2 in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

5
(b) Amylose and cellulose are polysaccharides.
Fig. 2.2 shows the structure of part of a cellulose molecule.
H OH CH2OH H OH CH2OH
H H O H H O
O O O O O
H O H H O H
Fig. 2.2
With reference to Fig. 2.2, state how the structure of a cellulose molecule differs from the
structure of an amylose molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Cellulose is the main component of plant cell walls.
Explain why cellulose is suitable as a component of plant cell walls.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

7
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of a monomer of the nucleic acid, messenger RNA.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Name D, E and F in Fig. 3.1.
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
F ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State one way in which the structure of DNA differs from the structure of messenger
RNA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
(b) Telomeres are repeating sequences of bases located at the ends of DNA molecules.
These repeating sequences do not code for proteins.
The enzyme telomerase ensures that telomeres do not shorten each time DNA is replicated.
Fig. 3.2A shows the end of a DNA molecule during replication. DNA polymerase cannot
attach to the region labelled X, so it cannot complete the synthesis of the new strand without
the action of telomerase.
Telomerase synthesises additional lengths of DNA that are added to the telomere. These
additional lengths are used by DNA polymerase to complete the process of replication.
X
Fig. 3.2B is an enlarged view
5’ of region X to show the action of the enzyme telomerase.3’
T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A G
A
A A TCCCA ATCCCA ATCC
3’ 5’
X
5’ 3’
T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A GGG T T A G
A A TCCCA ATCCCA ATCC

3’ 5’
G
C
A free nucleotides
A
C
T
T
G
telomerase
C
GT T AG A free nucleotides
A
CAAUCCC AAUC C
T
T template RNA
telomerase
GT T AG
C A A U C C CFig.
A A3.2
UC
template RNA
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

9
Telomerase contains a short length of RNA that acts as a template for the synthesis of DNA
as shown in Fig. 3.2B.
Explain how a molecule of telomerase synthesises additional lengths of DNA.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Telomerase is not present in prokaryotic cells.
Suggest why prokaryotes do not have telomerase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) One of the ways to diagnose lung cancer is to determine the concentration of telomerase in
cells from the lining of the bronchus.
Explain why determining the activity of telomerase may be useful in the diagnosis of lung
cancer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

10
4 (a) Describe the roles of the sinoatrial node (SAN) and the atrioventricular node (AVN) in the
initiation and control of the cardiac cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The Purkyne fibres pass down the septum and extend to the cardiac muscle at the base
(apex) of the heart.
Explain why it is important that the Purkyne fibres extend to the base of the heart.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

11
(c) The activity of the SAN is controlled by the nervous system. Noradrenaline is released by
nerve cells in the SAN.
Fig. 4.1 shows the role of noradrenaline in causing calcium ions (Ca2+) to enter a cell in the
SAN.
noradrenaline
phospholipid
bilayer
Ca2+ Ca2+
Ca2+ Ca2+ small gap
cell surface
membrane of
SAN cell
Ca2+
ATP cAMP
(second messenger) active enzyme opens
channel protein
inactive enzyme active enzyme
Fig. 4.1
With reference to Fig. 4.1, outline the process of cell signalling.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 10]

12
5 The bacteria that cause tuberculosis (TB) can be found in many parts of the body including the
lungs.
(a) (i) State the name of the bacterium that causes TB.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The presence of the pathogen in the lungs attracts phagocytes to the area of infection.
The phagocytes release elastase, which digests elastin.
Many people with TB feel tired all the time.
Suggest and explain how the effect of phagocytes on tissues in the lungs leads to people
feeling tired all the time.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Discuss the biological factors and social factors that make TB a difficult disease to control.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18
13

14
6 (a) As part of a study of the mitotic cell cycle, a student made stained sections of a root tip of
onion, Allium cepa, and observed them with a light microscope.
The student made drawings of six of the cells, A to F, using the high power of the microscope,
as shown in Fig. 6.1.
A D
B E
C F
Fig. 6.1
(i) Complete Table 6.1 to show the sequence of stages in the mitotic cell cycle, using the
letters, A to F, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
Table 6.1
sequence of stages cell
1 A
[1]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

15
(ii) Table 6.2 shows some events that occur during the mitotic cell cycle in A. cepa.
Complete Table 6.2 by naming the stage of the cell cycle when each event occurs.
Table 6.2
event in the cell cycle name of the stage in the cell cycle
DNA replication
division of centromeres
condensation of chromatin
contraction of spindle fibres
organisation of
metaphase
chromosomes at the equator
[4]
(b) Explain the importance of mitosis in the immune response.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 9700/23/O/N/18

Biology Print

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biology Print

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biology Print

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge International AS & A Level

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

Answer all questions.

Each of explanations A to F describes how a particular structural feature of a phloem sieve

A for entry of sucrose and other organic compounds

B for rapid entry of water to create high hydrostatic pressure

Use each letter only once.

The first row has been completed for you.

structural feature of phloem sieve tube element explanation

There is no nucleus or large permanent vacuole. F

The end walls are perforated to form sieve plates.

The cell has plasmodesmata connecting to a companion cell.

There is a thin cellulose cell wall.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

2 Phosphatidate phosphatase (PAP) enzymes have an important role in lipid metabolism.

The reaction catalysed by PAP is shown in Fig. 2.1.

(a) There are two types of PAP enzymes:

• PAP2 enzymes do not need Mg2+.

The results are shown in Fig. 2.2.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

3 During one cardiac cycle:

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

normal sickle cell

triplet in DNA template strand

triplet in DNA non-template strand G A G Q

mRNA codon formed G A G R

amino acid carried by tRNA glu val

(i) With reference to Fig. 3.1, state:

• the base sequence of DNA triplet P

• the base sequence of DNA triplet Q

• the base sequence of mRNA codon R.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

With reference to Fig. 3.2, state and explain these differences.

uptake of oxygen ......................................................................................................................

release of oxygen .....................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

• the trachea and a bronchus

• a bronchus and a bronchiole

• a bronchiole and an alveolus.

Complete Table 4.1 by:

• listing, in order, the three phases that occur during interphase

phase process occurring during phase

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

(b) State the full name of the pathogen known as HIV.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

(d) Fig. 5.1 shows global estimates of:

percentage of people living with HIV who received treatment

number of deaths from HIV/AIDS

(i) Describe the trends shown in Fig. 5.1.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20 [Turn over

6 Fig. 6.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of a plant parenchyma cell.

One function of parenchyma cells is to provide support to the plant.

© UCLES 2020 9700/22/F/M/20

(i) Explain what is meant by the term magnification.